YASKAWA L7 Manual PDF

Current Vector Controlled Inverter
Varispeed L7
Instruction Manual and
Parameter Description
Model: CIMR-L7C
Warnings
CAUTION
Cables must not be connected or disconnected, nor signal tests carried out, while the power is
switched on.
The Varispeed L7 DC bus capacitor remains charged even after the power has been switched off. To
avoid an electric shock hazard, disconnect the frequency inverter from the mains before carrying out
maintenance. Then wait for at least 5 minutes after all LEDs have gone out.
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the inverter. It contains semiconductors, which
are not designed for such high voltages.
Do not remove the digital operator while the mains supply is switched on. The printed circuit board
must also not be touched while the inverter is connected to the power.
Never connect general LC/RC interference suppression filters, capacitors or overvoltage protection
devices to the inverter input or output.
To avoid unnecessary overcurrent faults, etc, being displayed, the signaling contacts of any contactor
or switch fitted between inverter and motor must be integrated into the inverter control logic (eg
baseblock).
This is absolutely imperative!

This manual must be read thoroughly before connecting and operating the inverter. All safety
precautions and instructions for use must be followed.
The inverter must be operated with the appropriate line filters, following the installation instructions in
this manual and with all covers closed and terminals covered.
Only then will adequate protection be provided. Please do not connect or operate any equipment with
visible damage or missing parts. The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment
damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual.
3
Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use
1. General
Please read these safety precautions and instructions for use thoroughly before installing and operating this
inverter. Also read all of the warning signs on the inverter and ensure they are never damaged or removed.
Live and hot inverter components may be accessible during operation. Removal of housing components, the
digital operator or terminal covers runs the risk of serious injuries or damage in the event of incorrect installa-
tion or operation. The fact that frequency inverters control rotating mechanical machine components can give
rise to other dangers.
The instructions in this manual must be followed. Installation, operation and maintenance may only be carried
out by qualified personnel. For the purposes of the safety precautions, qualified personnel are defined as indi-
viduals who are familiar with the installation, starting, operation and maintenance of frequency inverters and
have the proper qualifications for this work. Safe operation of these units is only possible if they are used
properly for their intended purpose.
The DC bus capacitors can remain live for about 5 minutes after the inverter is disconnected from the power. It
is therefore necessary to wait for this time before opening its covers. All of the main circuit terminals may still
carry dangerous voltages.
Children and other unauthorized persons must not be allowed access to these inverters.
Keep these Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use readily accessible and supply them to all persons with
any form of access to the inverters.
2. Intended Use
Frequency inverters are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery.
Frequency inverters are designed and manufactured in accordance with applicable UL and cUL standards, and
CE Directives.
Their installation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of the Low Volt-
age Directive:
EN 50178, 1997-10, Equipping of Power Systems with Electronic Devices
EN 60204-1, 1997-12 Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices
Part 1: General Requirements (IEC 60204-1:1997)/
Please note: Includes Corrigendum of September 1998
EN 61010-1, A2, 1995 Safety Requirements for Information Technology Equipment
(IEC 950, 1991 + A1, 1992 + A2, 1993 + A3, 1995 + A4, 1996, modified)
CE marking is carried out to EN 50178, using the line filters specified in this manual and following the appro-
priate installation instructions.
3. Transportation and storage

The instructions for transportation, storage and proper handling must be followed in accordance with the tech-
nical data.
4. Installation
Install and cool the inverters as specified in the documentation. The cooling air must flow in the specified
direction. The inverter may therefore only be operated in the specified position (eg upright). Maintain the
specified clearances. Protect the inverters against impermissible loads. Components must not be bent nor insu-
lation clearances changed. To avoid damage being caused by static electricity, do not touch any electronic
components or contacts.
4
5. Electrical Connection
Carry out any work on live equipment in compliance with the national safety and accident prevention regula-
tions. Carry out electrical installation in compliance with the relevant regulations. In particular, follow the
installation instructions ensuring electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), eg shielding, grounding, filter
arrangement and laying of cables. This also applies to equipment with the CE mark. It is the responsibility of
the manufacturer of the system or machine to ensure conformity with EMC limits.
Your supplier or Yaskawa representative must be contacted when using leakage current circuit braker in con-
junction with frequency inverters.
In certain systems it may be necessary to use additional monitoring and safety devices in compliance with the
relevant safety and accident prevention regulations. The frequency inverter hardware must not be modified.
5
EMC Compatibility
1. Introduction
This manual was compiled to help system manufacturers using Yaskawa frequency inverters to design and
install electrical switchgear. It also describes the measures necessary to comply with the EMC Directive. The
manual's installation and wiring instructions must therefore be followed.
Our products are tested by authorized bodies using the standards listed below.
Product standard: EN 61800-3:1996
EN 61800-3; A11:2000
2. Measures to Ensure Conformity of Yaskawa Frequency inverters to the EMC Directive

Yaskawa frequency inverters do not necessarily have to be installed in a switch cabinet.
It is not possible to give detailed instructions for all of the possible types of installation. This manual therefore
has to be limited to general guidelines.
All electrical equipment produces radio and line-borne interference at various frequencies. The cables pass
this on to the environment like an aerial.
Connecting an item of electrical equipment (eg drive) to a supply without a line filter can therefore allow HF
or LF interference to get into the mains.
The basic countermeasures are isolation of the wiring of control and power components, proper grounding and
shielding of cables.
A large contact area is necessary for low-impedance grounding of HF interference. The use of grounding
straps instead of cables is therefore definitely advisable.
Moreover, cable shields must be connected with purpose-made ground clips.
3. Laying Cables
Measures Against Line-Borne Interference:
Line filter and frequency inverter must be mounted on the same metal plate. Mount the two components as
close to each other as possible, with cables kept as short as possible.
Use a power cable with well-grounded shield. Use a shielded motor cable not exceeding 20 meters in length.
Arrange all grounds so as to maximize the area of the end of the lead in contact with the ground terminal (eg
metal plate).
Shielded Cable:
– Use a cable with braided shield.
– Ground the maximum possible area of the shield. It is advisable to ground the shield by connecting the
cable to the ground plate with metal clips (see following figure).
6
Ground clip Ground plate
The grounding surfaces must be highly conductive bare metal. Remove any coats of varnish and paint.
– Ground the cable shields at both ends.
– Ground the motor of the machine.
7
Line Filters
Recommended Line Filters for Varispeed L7
Inverter Model Line Filter

Current Weight Dimensions
Varispeed L7 Model
(A) (kg) WxDxH
CIMR-L7C43P7 FS5972-10-07 10 1.1 141 x 46 x 330
CIMR-L7C44P0
FS5972-18-07 18 1.3 141 x 46 x 330
CIMR-L7C45P5
CIMR-L7C47P5 FS5972-21-07 21 1.8 206 x 50 x 355
CIMR-L7C4011 FS5972-35-07 35 2.1 206 x 50 x 355
CIMR-L7C4015
FS5972-60-07 60 4.0 236 x 65 x 408
CIMR-L7C4018
CIMR-L7C4022
FS5972-70-52 70 3.4 80 x 185 x 329
CIMR-L7C4030
CIMR-L7C4037
FS5972-100-35 100 4.5 90 x 150 x 326
CIMR-L7C4045
CIMR-L7C4055 FS5972-130-35 130 4.7 90 x 180 x 366
Maximum Voltage : AC 480V 3phase

Ambient Temperature : 45°C (max.)
* Permissible emission of power drive systems for commercial and light environment (EN61800-3, A11)
(general availability, 1st environment)
Inverter Model Line Filter

Current Weight Dimensions
Varispeed L7 Model
(A) (kg) WxDxH
CIMR-L7C23P7
FS5973-35-07 35 1.4 141 x 46 x 330
CIMR-L7C25P5
CIMR-L7C27P5
FS5973-60-07 60 3.0 206 x 60 x 355
CIMR-L7C2011
CIMR-L7C2015
FS5973-100-07 100 4.9 236 x 80 x 408
CIMR-L7C2018
CIMR-L7C2022
FS5973-130-35 130 4.3 90 x 180 x 366
CIMR-L7C2030
CIMR-L7C2037 FS5973-160-40 160 6.0 120 x 170 x 451
CIMR-L7C2045
FS5973-240-37 240 11.0 130 x 240 x 610
CIMR-L7C2055
Maximum Voltage : AC 240V 3phase

Ambient Temperature : 45°C (max.)
* max. motor cable length: 10 m Class B, 50 m Class A
Rated Voltage: AC240V 3 ph.
Ambient Temperature: 45°C (max.)
8
Installation inverters and EMC filters
PE L3
Ground Bonds
L1 L2 ( remove any paint )
PE
Line
Inverter
Filter
Load L2 V
PE L1 L3 U WPE
Cable Length
as short as possible
Metal Plate
Motor cable
screened
Ground Bonds
( remove any paint )
M
3~
9
Registered Trademarks
The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.
• DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association,
Inc.).
• InterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co.
• Profibus is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
10
1
Handling Inverters
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.
Varispeed L7 Introduction ......................................................1-2

Confirmations upon Delivery..................................................1-3
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ........................................1-7
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site .......................1-9
Installation Orientation and Space .......................................1-10
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover....................... 1-11
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator/Monitor and Front
Cover ....................................................................................1-12
Varispeed L7 Introduction
Varispeed L7 Models
The Varispeed L7 Series includes Inverters in two voltage classes: 200 V and 400 V. The maximum motor capacities
vary from 3.7 to 55 kW (23 models).
Table 1.1 Varispeed L7 Models

Specifications
Varispeed L7
Maximum (Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Voltage
Motor Output
Class Basic Model Open Chassis (IEC IP00) Enclosed Wall-mounted
Capacity kW Capacity
Number CIMR-L7C (NEMA 1) CIMR-L7C
kVA
3.7 7 CIMR-L7C23P7 23P71
5.5 10 CIMR-L7C25P5 25P51
Remove the top and
7.5 14 CIMR-L7C27P5 27P51
bottom covers from the Enclosed
11 20 CIMR-L7C2011 Wall-mounted model. 20111
15 27 CIMR-L7C2015 20151
200 V class 18.5 33 CIMR-L7C2018 20181
22 40 CIMR-L7C2022 20220 20221
30 54 CIMR-L7C2030 20300 20301
37 67 CIMR-L7C2037 20370 20371
45 76 CIMR-L7C2045 20450 20451
55 93 CIMR-L7C2055 20550 20551
3.7 7 CIMR-L7C43P7 43P71
4.0 9 CIMR-L7C44P0 44P01
5.5 12 CIMR-L7C45P5 Remove the top and bottom cov- 45P51
7.5 15 CIMR-L7C47P5 ers from the Enclosed Wall- 47P51
11 22 CIMR-L7C4011 mount model. 40111
15 28 CIMR-L7C4015 40151
400 V class
18.5 34 CIMR-L7C4018 40181
22 40 CIMR-L7C4022 40220 40221
30 54 CIMR-L7C4030 40300 40301
37 67 CIMR-L7C4037 40370 40371
45 80 CIMR-L7C4045 40450 40451
55 106 CIMR-L7C4055 40550 40551
* 200V/400V class 30KW-55KW model is developing.
1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery

Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.
Table 1.2 Checks

Item Method
Has the correct model of Inverter been
Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.
delivered?
Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or
Is the Inverter damaged in any way?
other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components
Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
loose?
If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or
your Yaskawa representative immediately.
1
Nameplate Information
There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter. The nameplate shows the model number, specifica-
tions, lot number, serial number, and other information on the Inverter.
Example Nameplate
The following nameplate is an example for a standard Inverter: 3-phase, 400 VAC,
3.7 kW, IEC IP20 NEMA1(Type1) standards
Inverter model MODEL CIMR-L7C43P7 SPEC: 43P71A Inverter

specifications
Input specification INPUT AC3PH 380-480V 50/60Hz 10.2A
Output specification OUTPUT AC3PH 0-480V 0-120Hz 8.5A 3min. 50%ED 8.5kVA
Lot number O/N MASS: 4.0 kg Mass
Serial number S/N PRG:
UL file number FILE NO E131457

YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORARION MADE IN JAPAN Ms
Fig 1.1 Nameplate
1-3
Inverter Model Numbers
The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum
motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
CIMR L7 A 2 3P7
Inverter
Varispeed L7
No. Specification No. Max. Motor Capacity

A with IM drives (open loop Vector Control) 3P7 3.7 kW
B with IM drives (PG card are optional) 5P5 5.5 kW
C with convertible drives for IM and PM to to
(with built-in PG interface) 55 55 kW
P Indicates the decimal point.
No. Voltage Class
2 AC Input, 3-phase, 200 V
Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers
Inverter Specifications
The Inverter specifications (“SPEC”) on the nameplate indicate the voltage class, maximum motor capacity,
the protective structure, and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
2 3P7 1
No. Voltage Class
4 AC Input, 3-phase 400 V
No. Max. Motor Capacity No. Protective Structure

3P7 3.7 kW 0 Open chassis (IEC IP00)
5P5 5.5 kW 1 Enclosed wall-mounted
to to (NEMA Type 1)
55 55 kW
7 Enclosed wall-mounted
“P” Indicates the decimal point (IEC IP20)
Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications
1-4
Component Names
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.4. The Inverter with the ter-
minal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.5.
Mounting
Front cover
Digital Operator
Diecast cover
1
Nameplate
Terminal cover
Bottom protective cover
Fig 1.4 Inverter Appearance (18.5 kW or Less)
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (18.5 kW or Less)
1-5
Inverters of 22 kW or More
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.6. The Inverter with the ter-
minal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.7.
Inveter cover Mounting holes
Cooling fan
Front cover
Digital Operator Nameplate
Terminal cover
Fig 1.6 Inverter Appearance (22 kW or More)
Control
circuit
terminals Charge indicator
Main
circuit
terminals
Ground terminals
Fig 1.7 Terminal Arrangement (22 kW or More)
1-6
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)
Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below.
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 3.7 to 18.5 kW 200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 55 kW

400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW
Fig 1.8 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1xIEC IP20)

Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1 y IEC IP20) are shown below.
Grommet
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 3.7 to 18.5 kW 200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 55 kW

400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW
Fig 1.9 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters
1-7
Table 1.3 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)
of 200V Class Inverters and 400V Class Inverters of 3.7 to 55 kW
Dimensions (mm)
Max.
Applicable Open Chassis (IP00) Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA1and IEC IP20)
Voltage
Motor
Class
Output Approx. Approx.
W H D W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 D1 t1 W H D W1 H0 H1 H2 H3 D1 t1
[kW] Mass Mass
3.7
140 280 177 126 266 7 59 5 4 140 280 177 126 280 266 7 59 5 4
5.5 0
7.5 6 300 6
200 300 197 186 285 8 65.5 200 197 186 300 285 8 65.5
11 7 310 10 7
15 350 0
200V 240 350 207 216 335 78 2.3 11 240 207 216 350 335 78 2.3 11
18.5 - - 380 30
(3 Phase) 7.5 7.5
22 250 400 195 385 21 254 535 195 400 385 135 24
258 100 258
30 275 450 220 435 24 279 615 220 450 435 165 100 27
37 298 100 57 298 62
375 600 250 575 380 809 250 600 575 209
45 328 12.5 3.2 63 328 12.5 3.2 68
130 130
55 450 725 348 325 700 86 453 1027 348 325 725 700 302 94
3.7
4 140 280 177 126 266 7 59 5 4 140 280 177 126 280 266 7 59 5 4
5.5
7.5 0
200 300 197 186 285 8 65.5 6 200 300 197 186 300 285 8 65.5 6
11
400V 15
240 350 207 216 - - 335 78 10 240 350 207 216 350 335 78 10
(3 Phase) 18.5
22 2.3 2.3
275 450 258 220 435 100 21 279 535 258 220 450 435 100 24
30 7.5 7.5 85
37 635
45 325 550 283 260 535 105 36 329 283 260 550 535 105 40
715 165
55
1-8
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site

Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.
Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions in a pollution degree 2 environment.
Table 1.4 Installation Site

Type Ambient Operating Temperature Humidity
Enclosed wall-mounted
-10 to + 40 °C 95% RH or less (no condensation)
(NEMA1 and IEC IP20)
Open chassis -10 to + 45 °C 95% RH or less (no condensation)
Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers
before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or less in a panel. 1
Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.
• Install the Inverter in a clean location which is free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally
enclosed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
• When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other
foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
• Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
• Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.
• Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.
Controlling the Ambient Temperature

To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme
temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a cooling fan
or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45°C.
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter

Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.
Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be
reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.
1-9
Installation Orientation and Space
Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always
provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.
B
A
Air
30 mm min. 30 mm min. 120 mm min.

50 mm min.
Air
Horizontal Space Vertical Space
A B
200V class inverter, 3.7 to 55 kW
50 mm 120 mm
400V class inverter, 3.7 to 55 kW
Fig 1.10 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space
1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and Enclosed Wall-
mounted (IP20, NEMA 1) Inverters.
2. Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of
18.5 kW or less in a panel.
IMPORTANT Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or
400 V Class Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more in a panel.
1-10
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover

Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.
Removing the Terminal Cover

Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the direc-
tions of arrows 1, and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
1
1
2
1
Fig 1.11 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-L7C43P7 Shown Above)
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direc-
tion of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
Fig 1.12 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-L7C4022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Terminal Cover

When wiring the terminal block has been completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal proce-
dure.
For Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove
on the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.
1-11
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator/Monitor
and Front Cover
To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connector, remove the Digital Operator/Monitor and front
cover in addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator/Monitor from the front cover
before removing the front cover.
The removal and attachment procedures are described below.
Removing the Digital Operator/Monitor

Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator/Monitor in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital
Operator/Monitor and lift the Digital Operator/Monitor in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Oper-
ator/Monitor as shown in the following illustration.
2
1
Fig 1.13 Removing the Digital Operator/Monitor (Model CIMR-L7C43P7 Shown Above)
1-12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator/Monitor and Front Cover
Removing the Front Cover

Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in
the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.
1
2
1
Fig 1.14 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-L7C43P7 Shown Above)
Mounting the Front Cover

After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing the steps to remove the front
cover in reverse order.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator/Monitor attached to the front cover; otherwise,
Digital Operator/Monitor may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of
the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.
Mounting the Digital Operator/Monitor

After attaching the terminal cover, mount the Digital Operator/Monitor onto the Inverter using the following
procedure.
1. Hook the Digital Operator/Monitor at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as
shown in the following illustration.
2. Press the Digital Operator/Monitor in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).
Fig 1.15 Mounting the Digital Operator/Monitor
1-13
1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator/Monitor or mount or remove the front cover using methods
other than those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect con-
tact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator/Monitor attached to the front cover.
IMPORTANT Imperfect contact can result.
Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator/Monitor to
the front cover.
For inverters with an output of 22 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following proce-
dures to remove the Digital Operator/Monitor and main cover.
Removing the Digital Operator/Monitor

Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
Removing the Front Cover

Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card in the direction of arrow 2.
Fig 1.16 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-L7C4022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Front Cover

After completing required work, such as mounting an optional card or setting the terminal card, attach the
front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator/Monitor is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if
the cover is attached while the Digital Operator/Monitor is mounted to it.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it
clicks into place on the Inverter.
Attaching the Digital Operator/Monitor

Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
1-14
Wiring 2
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit termi-
nal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
Connections to Peripheral Devices..............................2-2

Connection Diagram ....................................................2-3
Terminal Block Configuration .......................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals ......................................2-6
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ................................2-19
Wiring Check .............................................................2-27
Installing and Wiring Option Cards ............................2-28
Connections to Peripheral Devices
Examples of connections between the Inverter and typical peripheral devices are shown in Fig 2.1.
Power supply
Molded-case
circuit breaker
Magnetic con-
tactor (MC)
AC reactor for power

factor improvement
Braking resistor
Input noise filter
DC reactor for power

factor improvement
Inverter
Ground
Output noise filter
Motor
Ground
Fig 2.1 Example Connections to Peripheral Devices
2-2
Connection Diagram
Connection Diagram
The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in Fig 2.2.
When using the Digital Operator/Monitor, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.
DC reactor to
improve input
power factor Braking Resistor
(Optionnal) unit (optional)
U X
Short -circuit
Bar
Magnetic
MCCB Contactor (+1) (+2) B1 B2
(-) Moter
R L1(R) U/T1
3-phase power
380 to 480V L2(S) V/T2
S IM/PM
50/60Hz
T L3(T) W/T3
Forward run/stop S1
PG+
Reverse run/stop S2 PG- P
A(+)
External Fault S3 A(-) P PG
2
B(+)
Fault Reset S4 B(-) P
Z(+)
Multi-fanction P
Multi f-step speed setting 1 S5 Z(-)
contact Inputs
(Factory setting)
Multi f-step speed setting 2 S6
E(G)
JOG reference S7
DA(+)
Hardware baseblock BB DA(-) A Pulse
Pulse Monitor Output
+24V DB(+) RS-422 Level
8mA DB(-) B Pulse (30m or less wiring)
SC
IP24V (24V)
MA
CN5 (NPN setting) Fault contact Output
MB
250VAC 1A or less
30VDC 1A or less
E(G) MC
M1
Frequency setting Brake Command
adjustment M2 (Factory setting)
+V Frequency setting
2KΩ power +15V 20mA
External frequency Frequency setter M3
reference 3 Contactor Control Multi-fanction Contact
2KΩ 2 0 to 10V A1 Master speed
reference 0 to 10V M4 (Factory setting) Output
1 P 250VAC 1A or less
AC 30VDC 1A or less
M5
0V Inverter Ready
R+ M6 (Factory setting)
P
MOMOBUS R-
communication
RS-485/422 S+
P
S-
Communication
IG 2CN and
Control Cards
(For Option)
P0
Input Voltage DC/DC Output Voltage
48/96VDC Converter P
For Battery For option N0 For Contorl power supply
Note:
1.Main circuit terminals are indicatied with double circles and
control circuit terminals are indicatied with a single circles Shielded Twisted-pair
2.The output current capacity of the +V terminal is 20mA wires wires
3.Sequence input signal S1 to S7 and BB are labelled for sequence
connections for no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors as the
default setting.
4.The master frequency reference is set to a voltage input reference
as the default setting.
Fig 2.2 Connection Diagram (Model CIMR-L7C43P7 Shown Above)
2-3
Circuit Descriptions
Refer to the numbers indicated in Fig 2.2.
1 These circuits are hazardous and are separated from accessible surfaces by protective separation
2 These circuits are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and
reinforced insulation. These circuits may be interconnected with SELV (or equivalent) or non-
SELV circuits, but not both.
3 Inverters supplied by a four-wire-system source (neutral grounded)
These circuits are SELV circuits and are separated from all other circuits by protective separation
consisting of double and reinforced insulation. These circuits may only be interconnected with
other SELV (or equivalent) circuits.
Inverters supplied by a three-wire-system source (ungrounded or corner grounded)

These circuits are not separated from hazardous circuits other circuits by protective separation, but
only with basic insulation. These circuits must not be interconnected with any circuits which are
accessible, unless they are isolated from accessible circuits by supplemental insulation
1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.
R+ R- S+ S- IG A+ B+ Z+ PG+ DA+ DB+
E(G) SC SC SC BB PG- A- B- Z- PG- DA- DB- M5 M6 MA MB MC E(G)

IMPORTANT
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 +V A1 AC M3 M4 M1 M2
2. The output current capability of the +V terminal is 20 mA.

3. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with sin-
gle circles.
4. The wiring of the digital inputs S1 to S7 and BB is shown for the connection of contacts or NPN transis-
tors (0V common and sinking mode). This is the default setting.
For the connection of PNP transistors or for using a 24V external power supply, refer to Table 2.11.
5. A DC reactor is an option only for Inverters of 18.5 kW or less. Remove the short circuit bar when con-
necting a DC reactor.
2-4
Terminal Block Configuration
Terminal Block Configuration

The terminal arrangements are shown in Fig 2.3 and Fig 2.4.
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 2.3 Terminal Arrangement (200 V/400 V Class Inverter of 3.7 kW)
2
Control
circuit
terminals Charge indicator
Main
circuit
terminals
Ground terminals
Fig 2.4 Terminal Arrangement (200 V/400 V Class Inverter of 22 kW or more)
2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors

Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2.1 to Table 2.3. Refer to instruction manual
TOE-C726-2 for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units.
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes

Recom-
Inverter Termi- Tightening Possible mended
Model Terminal Symbol nal Torque Wire Sizes Wire Size Wire Type
CIMR- Screws
(N•m) mm2(AWG) mm2
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
3.5 to 5.5 3.5
L7C23P7 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, PO, NO M4 1.2 to 1.5
(12 to 10) (12)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

5.5 5.5
L7C25P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, PO, NO M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10) (10)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

8 to 14 8
L7C27P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, PO, NO M5 2.5
(8 to 6) (8)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

14 to 22 14
L7C2011 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, PO, NO M5 2.5
(6 to 4) (6)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2, 30 to 38 30

M6 4.0 to 5.0
W/T3, NO (4 to 2) (4)
L7C2015 8 to 14
B1, B2, PO M5 2.5 -
(8 to 6)
22 22
M6 4.0 to 5.0
(4) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2, 30 to 38 30
M8 9.0 to 10.0
W/T3, NO (3 to 2) (3)
Power cables,
L7C2018 8 to 14 e.g., 600 V vinyl
B1, B2, PO M5 2.5 -
(8 to 6) power cables
22 22
M6 4.0 to 5.0
(4) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, 30 to 60 30
M8 9.0 to 10.0
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO (3 to 1) (3)
L7C2022 8 to 22
3, PO M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1, 50 to 60 50
M8 9.0 to 10.0
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO (1 to 1/0) (1)
L7C2030 8 to 22
3, PO M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1, 60 to 100 60
M10 17.6 to 22.5
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO (2/0 to 4/0) (2/0)
5.5 to 22
3, PO M8 8.8 to 10.8 –
L7C2037 (10 to 4)
30 to 60 30
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(2 to 2/0) (2)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/l1, ∆/l2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
2-6
Recom-
CIMR- Screws
(N•m) mm2(AWG) mm2
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1, 80 to 100 80
M10 17.6 to 22.5
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO (3/0 to 4/0) (3/0)
5.5 to 22
3, PO M8 8.8 to 10.8 –
L7C2045 (10 to 4)
38 to 60 38
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(1 to 2/0) (1)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/l1, ∆/l2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
Power cables,
50 to 100 50 × 2P e.g., 600 V vinyl
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 , NO M12 31.4 to 39.2
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0 × 2P) power cables
100 100
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M10 17.6 to 22.5
(4/0) (4/0)
5.5 to 60
L7C2055 3, PO M8 8.8 to 10.8 –
(10 to 2/0)
30 to 60 50
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(3 to 4/0) (1/0)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/l1, ∆/l2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C
2
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes
Recom-
CIMR- Screws
(N•m) mm2 (AWG) mm2
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 3.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO 2 to 5.5 (12)
L7C43P7 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) 2
(14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 3.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO 2 to 5.5 (12)
L7C44P0 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) 2
(14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 3.5 to 5.5 3.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO (12 to 10) (12)
L7C45P5 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5 2
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 5.5
5.5(10)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO (10)
L7C47P5 M4 1.2 to 1.5
3.5 to 5.5 3.5
(12 to 10) (12)
Power cables,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 8 e.g., 600 V vinyl
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO 5.5 to 14 (8) power cables
L7C4011 M5 2.5
(10 to 6) 5.5
(10)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 8 to 14 8
M5 2.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO (8 to 6) (8)
L7C4015
M5 2.5 5.5 to 14 5.5
(M6) (4.0 to 5.0) (10 to 6) (10)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2, 8 to 38 8
M6 4.0 to 5.0
W/T3, NO (8 to 2) (8)
L7C4018 8 8
B1, B2, PO M5 2.5
(8) (8)
8 to 22 8
M6 4.0 to 5.0
(8 to 4) (8)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2, 14 to 22 14
M6 4.0 to 5.0
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO, PO (6 to 4) (6)
L7C4022
14 to 38 14
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(6 to 2) (6)
2-7
Recom-
CIMR- Screws
(N•m) mm2 (AWG) mm2
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2, 22 22
M6 4.0 to 5.0
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO, PO (4) (4)
L7C4030
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/ 22 to 60 38
M8 9.0 to 10.0
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO (4 to 1/0) (2)
L7C4037 8 to 22
3, PO M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
Power cables,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/ 38 to 60 38 e.g., 600 V vinyl
M8 9.0 to 10.0
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO (2 to 1/0) (2) power cables
L7C4045 8 to 22
3, PO M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, 50 to 60 50
M8 9.0 to 10.0
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO (1 to 1/0) (1)
L7C4055 8 to 22
3, PO M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C.
2-8
Table 2.3 Lug Sizes (JIS C2805) (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Wire Thickness (mm2) Terminal Screws Size

M3.5 1.25 / 3.5
0.5
M4 1.25 / 4
M3.5 1.25 / 3.5
0.75
M4 1.25 / 4
M3.5 1.25 / 3.5
1.25
M4 1.25 / 4
M3.5 2 / 3.5
M4 2/4
2 M5 2/5
M6 2/6
M8 2/8
M4 5.5 / 4
3.5/5.5
M5 5.5 / 5 2
M6 5.5 / 6
M8 5.5 / 8
M5 8/5
8 M6 8/6
M8 8/8
M6 14 / 6
14
M8 14 / 8
M6 22 / 6
22
M8 22 / 8
30/38 M8 38 / 8
M8 60 / 8
50/60
M10 60 / 10
80 80 / 10
M10
100 100 / 10
100 100 / 12
150 M12 150 / 12
200 200 / 12
M12 x 2 325 / 12
325
M16 325 / 16
Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line
voltage drop is calculated as follows:
Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (W/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10-3
IMPORTANT
2-9
Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2.4. Wire the terminals
correctly for the desired purposes.
Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Model: CIMR-L7C
Purpose Terminal Symbol
200 V Class 400 V Class
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 23P7 to 2055 43P7 to 4055
Main circuit power input
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 2022 to 2055 4022 to 4055
Inverter outputs U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 23P7 to 2055 43P7 to 4055
DC bus terminals 1, 23P7 to 2055 43P7 to 4055
Braking Resistor Unit connec-

B1, B2 23P7 to 2018 43P7 to 4018
tion
DC reactor connection 1, 2 23P7 to 2018 43P7 to 4018
Braking Unit connection 3, 2022 to 2055 4022 to 4055
Ground 23P7 to 2055 43P7 to 4055
Battery power input PO, NO 23P7 to 2055 43P7 to 4055
2-10
Main Circuit Configurations

The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in Table 2.5.
Table 2.5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations
200 V Class 400 V Class
CIMR－L7C23P7 to 2018
CIMR－L7C43P7 to 4018
B2
B2
B1
B1
+１
+１
+2 +2
U/T1 U/T1
R/L1 R/L1
S/L2 V/T2 V/T2
S/L2
T/L3 W/T3 T/L3 W/T3
- -
Power Control Power Control

Supply Circuit Supply Circuit
N0 P0 N0 P0
2
CIMR－L7C2022,2030 CIMR－L7C4022 to 4055
＋３＋３
＋１＋１
R/L1 R/L1
U/T1 U/T1
S/L2 S/L2
T/L3 V/T2 T/L3 V/T2
R1/L11 R1/L11
W/T3 W/T3
S1/L21 S1/L21
T1/L31 T1/L31
- -
Power Control
Power Control
Supply Circuit
Supply Circuit
N0 P0
N0 P0
CIMR－L7C2037 to 2055
＋３
＋１
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
T/L3 V/T2
R1/L11 W /T3
S1/L21
T1/L31
-
ｒ/l1
Power Control
Supply Circuit
N0 P0
Note: Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-phase rectification.
2-11
Standard Connection Diagrams
Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2.5. These are the same for both 200 V Class and
400 V Class Inverters. The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.
CIMR-L7C23P7 to 2018 and 43P7 to 4018 CIMR-L7C2022, 2030, and 4022 to 4055
DC reactor Unit (optional)

(optional)
Braking Resistor Braking Unit
Unit (optional) (optional)
3-phase 200 3-phase 200 VAC

VAC (400 VAC) (400 VAC)
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC

The DC reactor is built in.
reactor.
CIMR-L7C2037 to 2055
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
3-phase
200 VAC
Control power is supplied internally from the DC bus at all inverter models.
Fig 2.5 Main Circuit Terminal Connections
2-12
Wiring the Main Circuits

This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.
Wiring Main Circuit Inputs

Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input.
Installing Fuses
To protect the inverter, it is recommended to use semiconductor fuses like they are shown in the table below.
Table 2.6 Input Fuses

Inverter Type FUSE
Voltage (V) Current (A) I2t (A2s)
23P7 240 30 82~220
25P5 240 40 220~610
2
27P5 240 60 290~1300
2011 240 80 450~5000
2015 240 100 1200~7200
2018 240 130 1800~7200
2022 240 150 870~16200
2030 240 180 1500~23000
2037 240 240 2100~19000
2045 240 300 2700~55000
2055 240 350 4000~55000
43P7 480 15 34~72

44P0 480 20 50~570
45P5 480 25 100~570
47P5 480 30 100~640
4011 480 50 150~1300
4015 480 60 400~1800
4018 480 70 700~4100
4022 480 80 240~5800
4030 480 100 500~5800
4037 480 125 750~5800
4045 480 150 920~13000
4055 480 150 1500~13000
2-13
Installing a Moulded-case Circuit Breaker
When connecting the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) to the power supply using a moulded-case
circuit breaker (MCCB) observe that the circuit breaker is suitable for the Inverter.
• Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times of the inverter's rated current.
• For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the inverter's overload protection (one minute at
150% of the rated output current).
Installing an Earth Leakage Breaker

Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. If an earth leakage
breaker should be used, select one that detects only the leakage current which is in the frequency range that is
hazardous to humans but not high-frequency leakage currents.
• For a special-purpose earth leakage breaker for Inverters, choose one with a sensitivity amperage of at
least 30 mA per Inverter.
• When using a general earth leakage breaker, choose one with a sensitivity amperage of 200 mA or more
per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.
Installing a Magnetic Contactor

If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off by a control circuit, a magnetic contactor can be used.
The following things should be considered:
• The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.
Do not exceed one power upper hour.
• When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator/Monitor, automatic operation cannot be performed
after recovery from a power interruption.
Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block

Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of
input power supply is irrelevant to the output phase sequence.
Installing an AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or a phase advancing
capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the inverter
unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reac-
tor connection terminals.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
Installing a Surge Absorber

Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include mag-
netic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.
2-14
Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit

Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.
Connecting the Inverter and Motor

Connect output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 respective to the motor lead wires U, V, and W.
Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command. Switch over any two of the output termi-
nals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command.
Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals

Never connect a power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. If voltage is applied to the output
terminals, the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.
Never Short or Ground Output Terminals

If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter
case, an electric shock or grounding may occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.
Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor 2

Never connect a phase advancing capacitor to an output circuit. The high-frequency components of the
Inverter output may overheat and be damaged and may cause other parts to burn.
Using a Magnetic Contactor

Check the control sequence to make sure, that the magnetic contactor (MC) between the Inverter and motor is
not turned ON or OFF during inverter operation. If the MC is turned ON while the Inverter is operating, a
large inrush current will be created and the inverter’s overcurrent protection may operate.
2-15
Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
The cable between the Inverter and motor is 30 m max.
Ground Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.
• Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω and that
of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Ω.
• Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
• Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the
length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the
ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.
• When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
OK NO
Fig 2.6 Ground Wiring
Connecting a Braking Resistor and Braking Unit (CDBR)

Connect a Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit to the Inverter as shown in the Fig 2.7.
Connecting a Braking Resistor and Braking Unit (CDBR)

Connect a Braking Resistor and Braking Unit to the Inverter like shown in the Fig 2.7.
The example shows a braking resistor with integrated thermal overload switch. To prevent the braking unit/
braking resistor from overheating, design the control circuit to turn OFF the power supply using the thermal
overload relay contacts of the units as shown in Fig 2.7.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 3.7 to 18.5 kW Output Capacity
Braking Resistor Unit
Thermal overload
Inverter
relay contact
2-16
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 22 kW or higher Output Capacity
CDBR Braking Unit Braking Resistor Unit
Thermal overload
Inverter
relay contact
Thermal overload
relay contact
Fig 2.7 Connecting the Braking Resistor and Braking Unit
2-17
Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and jumper settings like shown in
Fig 2.8. There is a jumper for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a master or slave. Select “Master”
for the first Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e. from the second Unit
onwards).
Thermal overload relay contact Thermal overload relay contact Thermal overload relay contact
Braking Braking
Braking Resistor Resistor
Resistor Unit Unit
Unit (LKEB) (LKEB)
(LKEB)
Inverter
detector
Level
Braking Unit #2 Braking Unit #3
Braking Unit #1
Thermal overload relay Thermal overload relay Thermal overload relay
contact contact contact
Fig 2.8 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
Connecting the battery power supply

Varispeed L7 is equipped with the cable for the battery power supply connection by the standard.
Please detach the twisted-pair cable connected with main circuit terminal B1/+3 and -.
Please connect the twisted-pair cable by using the relay terminal for UPS/Battery.
Connecting the battery power supply as shown in Fig 2.9 .
Table 2.7
L2-11 (Battery Voltage) To use the battery voltage is input

H1-05 (Terminal S7 function selection) Setting “85” Battery operation command
Inverter
UPS/Battery terminal
P0
N0
Fig 2.9 Connecting the battery power supply
2-18
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wire Sizes
For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Analog Operator or oper-
ation signals and the Inverter to 30 m or less, and separate the lines from main power lines or other control cir-
cuits to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting frequencies from an external frequency source (and not from a Digital Operator/Monitor), used
shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield for the largest area of contact between shield and ground.
The terminal numbers and the appropriate wire sizes are shown in Table 2.8.
Table 2.8 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)
Recom-
Termi- Tightening Possible
mended
Terminals nal Torque Wire Sizes Wire Type
Wire Size
Screws (N•m) mm2(AWG)
mm2(AWG) 2
R+, R-, S+, S-IG, A+, A-,
B+, B-, Z+, Z-, PG+, PG-, Single wire*3:
DA+, DA-, DB+, DB-, 0.14 to 2.5
Phoenix Stranded 0.75 • Shielded, twisted-pair wire*1
AC, SC, A1, +V, S1, S2, 0.5 to 0.6 • Shielded, polyethylene-cov-
type wire: (18)
S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, BB, ered, vinyl sheath cable
MA, MB, MC, M1, M2, 0.14 to 1.5
(26 to 14) (KPEV-S by Hitachi Electrical
M3, M4, M5, M6 Wire or equivalent)
E (G) M3.5 0.8 to 1.0 0.5 to 2*2 1.25

(20 to 14) (12)
* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.
* 2. Refer to Table 2.3 for suitable lug sizes for the wires.
* 3. We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines

Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the following table.
Table 2.9 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Wire Size mm2 (AWG) Model d1 d2 L Manufacturer

0.25 (24) AI 0.25 - 8YE 0.8 2 12.5
0.5 (20) AI 0.5 - 8WH 1.1 2.5 14
0.75 (18) AI 0.75 - 8GY 1.3 2.8 14 Phoenix Contact
1.25 (16) AI 1.5 - 8BK 1.8 3.4 14
2 (14) AI 2.5 - 8BU 2.3 4.2 14
2-19
L
Fig 2.10 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Wiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.
2
Screwdriver Blade of screwdriver
Control circuit
terminal block
Strip the end for

7 mm if no sold-
erless terminal is
used. Solderless terminal or wire 3.5 mm max.
without soldering
Wires Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.
Fig 2.11 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block
2-20
Control Circuit Terminal Functions

The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2.10. Use the appropriate terminals for the
correct purposes.
Table 2.10 Control Circuit Terminals with default settings

Type Terminal Signal Function Description Signal Level
S1 Forward run/stop Forward run at "closed", stop at "open"
S2 Reverse run/stop Reverse run at "closed", stop at "open"
S3 External Fault Factory setting: Nominal speed at "closed" <2>
S4 Fault Reset Factory setting: fault reset at "closed" <2>
Digital Multi-function input Factory setting: Multi-step speed ref.1 at
S5 Opto-coupler isolation
input selection 1 "closed" <2>
Input +24VDC 8mA
signals Multi-function input Factory setting: Multi-step speed ref.2 at
S6
selection 2 "closed" <2>
2
S7 JOG Reference Factory setting: JOG Reference at "closed" <2>
S8 Hardware baseblock baseblock release at "closed", effective at "open"
SC Sequence control input common terminal
+15V Power supply
+V For analog reference +15V power supply +15V
Analog output
input Multi-function analog 0 to 10V/100% 0 to10V
A1
signals input Factory setting: Master freq.ref. (Input impedance 20KΩ)
AC Analog common 0V −
M1
Multi-function contact
Factory setting: Brake Command
output 1 (NO contact)
M2
M3
Factory setting: Contactor Control
output 2 (NO contact)
M4
Sequence Dry contact contact
output M5 Multi-function contact capacity 250V AC 1A,
Factory setting: During Inverter Ready
signals M6 output 3 (NO contact) 30V DC 1A
Fault output
MA Fault at "closed"between terminals MA and MC
(NO contact)
Fault output
MB Fault at "open"between terminals MB and MC
(NC contact)
Relay contact output
MC −
common
Power +12V/+5V PG power supply 12V/5V can be selected +12V: 200mA max
+5V: 200mA max
IG 0V PG power supply GND Impossible to use both
A(+) + A phase positive pulse input
A(-) - A phase negative pulse input
PG pulse B(+) + B phase positive pulse input
input
B(-) - B phase negative pulse input PG signal input
Z(+) + Z phase positive pulse input RS-422 level
Z(-) - Z phase negative pulse input

PG pulse input com-
IG 0V
mon
2-21
Table 2.10 Control Circuit Terminals with default settings (Continued)
Type Terminal Signal Function Description Signal Level
DA+ + A phase positive pulse monitor
PG output DA- - A phase negative pulse monitor PG output ratio
ratio DB+ + B phase positive pulse monitor RS-422 level
DB- - B phase negative pulse monitor
R+ MEMOBUS Differential input PHC
RS-422/
R- communication input When using two RS-485 wires, short-circuit isolation
485
MEMO- S+ MEMOBUS between R+ and S+, R- and S- Differential input PHC
BUS S- communication output isolation
Commu-
nication Shielded wire for
IG − −
communication
* 1. Do not use this power supply for supplying any external equipment.
* 2. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil with DC power supply, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Fig 2.12.
Flywheel diode
The rating of the flywheel diode

External power: Coil must be at least as high as the
30 VDC max. 1 A max. circuit voltage.
Fig 2.12 Flywheel Diode Connection
Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1

The shunt connector CN5 and DIP switch S1 are described in this section.
Terminating registance
(Default: OFF)
CN5 setting
(Default: NPN setting)
Fig 2.13 Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1
2-22
Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common-NPN) and sourcing mode
(+24V common-PNP) by using the jumper CN5. An external power supply is also supported, providing more
freedom in signal input methods.
Table 2.11 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals
Internal Power Supply – Sinking Mode External Power Supply – Sinking Mode
S1
S1
S2
S2
B1 B2 B3
B1 B2 B3
CN5 IP24V
CN5 IP24V
(+24V)
(+24V) A1 A2 A3
A1 A2 A3
2
+ SC
SC
24 VDC
Internal Power Supply – Sourcing Mode External Power Supply – Sourcing Mode
S1 S1
S2 S2
B1 B2 B3 B1 B2 B3
CN5 IP24V CN5 IP24V

(+24V) (+24V)
A1 A2 A3 A1 A2 A3
SC - SC
24 VDC
2-23
The setting of S1 switch on the control card
Varispeed L7C control card has the S1 switch for selecting a encorder power supply voltage. Please select the
appropriate voltage setting before connecting a motor encorder. The default setting is that both c and d
switches are ON position, which the power supply voltage is selected 5V DC.
5VDC power supply Adjustment
(Default: DC5.15±0.05V)
5VDC power supply Adjustment

(Default: DC12.4±0.05V)
Encoder power supply selection

(Default: 5VDC)
5V
Setting Setting Voltage of
ON of ① of ② Power supply
OFF OFF DC12V *1
ON ON
DC5V *2
OFF (default) (default)
OFF ON Don't use *3
ON OFF Don't use *3
① ②
12V
Fig 2.14 Encoder Power supply selcting switch S1
* 1. Default voltage setting is DC12.4 ± 0.05V

* 2. 1 Default voltage setting is DC5.15 ± 0.05V
* 3. This voltage isn't regulated, therefore DO NOT SELECT and DO NOT USE FOR A ENCODER POWER SUPPLY.
2-24
Control Circuit Terminal Connections

Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2.15.
Forward run/stop S1
PG+
Reverse run/stop S2 PG- P
A(+)
External Fault S3 A(-) P PG
B(+)
Fault Reset S4 B(-) P
Multi-fanction Z(+)
2
contact Inputs Multi f-step speed setting 1 S5 Z(-) P
(Factory setting)
Multi f-step speed setting 2 S6
E(G)
JOG reference S7
DA(+)
Hardware baseblock BB DA(-) A Pulse Pulse Monitor Output
DB(+) RS-422 Level
+24V 8mA
DB(-) B Pulse (30m or less wiring)
SC
IP24V (24V)
MA
CN5 (NPN setting) Fault contact Output
MB
250VAC 1A or less
30VDC 1A or less
E(G) MC
M1
Frequency setting Brake Command
adjustment M2 (Factory setting)
+V Frequency setting
power +15V 20mA
2KΩ
External frequency Frequency setter M3 Multi-fanction Contact Output
3 Contactor Control
reference 2 0 to 10V A1 Master speed 250VAC 1A or less
2KΩ M4 (Factory setting)
reference 0 to 10V
1 30VDC 1A or less
P
AC
M5
0V Inverter Ready
R+ M6 (Factory setting)
P
R-
MOMOBUS
communication S+
RS-485/422
P Communication
S-
and
IG 2CN Control Cards
(For Option)
P0
Input Voltage DC/DC
Converter Output Voltage
48/96VDC P
For Battery For option N0 For Contorl power supply
Note:
1.Main circuit terminals are indicatied with double circles and Shielded Twisted-pair
control circuit terminals are indicatied with a single circles wires wires
2.The output current capacity of the +V terminal is 20mA
3.Sequence input signal S1 to S7 and BB are labelled for sequence
connections for no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors as the
default setting .
4. The master frequency reference is set to a voltage input refer-
ence as the default setting .
Fig 2.15 Control Circuit Terminal Connections
2-25
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
• Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, , 1, 2, and 3, PO, NO) and other high-power lines.
• Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, and M6 (contact out-
puts) from wiring to other control circuit terminals.
• If using an optional external power supply, it shall be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source.
• Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults.
• Ground the cable shields with the maximum contact area of the shield and ground.
• Cable shields have to be grounded on both cable ends.
2-26
Wiring Check
Wiring Check
Checks
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform continuity check on control circuits. Per-
form the following checks on the wiring.
• Is all wiring correct?
• Have no wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?
• Are all screws tight?
• Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?
2-27
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Option Card Models and Specifications

Up to two Option Cards can be mounted on the controller card (C and D) shown in Fig 2.16.
Table 2.12 lists the type of Option Cards and their specifications.
Table 2.12 Option Card Specifications

Mounting
Card Model Specifications
Location
DeviceNet
SI-N1 Option card for DeviceNet fieldbus C
communications card
Profibus-DP
SI-P1 Option card for Profibus-DP fieldbus C
communications card
InterBus-S
SI-R1 Option card for InterBus-S fieldbus C
communications card
CANOpen
SI-S1 Option card for CANOpen fieldbus C
communications card
2 channel high resolution analog input card
Channel 1: 0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
AI-14U C
Channel 2: 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
Resolution: 14 Bit
Analog Input Cards
3 Channel high resolution analog input card
Signal level: -10 to +10 V (20 kΩ)
AI-14B C
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
Resolution: 13 Bit + sign
DI-08 8 bit digital speed reference input card C
Digital Input Cards
DI-16H2 16 bit digital speed reference input card C
AO-08 8 bit analog outputs, 2 channels D
Analog Monitor Card
AO-12 12-bit analog outputs, 2 channels D
DO-08 Six photocoupler outputs and 2 relay outputs D
Digital Output Card
DO-02C 2 relay outputs D
Installation
Before mounting an Option Card, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the
Inverter is not lit anymore. After that remove the Digital Operator/Monitor and front cover and then mount the
Option Card.
Refer to documentation provided with the Option Card for the mounting instructions for option slot C and D.
2-28
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Preventing C and D Option Card Connectors from Rising

After installing an Option Card into slot C or D, insert an Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector
from rising. The Option Clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the Clip and
pulling it out.
Remove the Option Clip before installing an Option Card into slot C or D. The Option Card can not be
installed completely and may not function properly if it is installed with the Option Clip attached.
2CN
C Option Card connector
2
C Option Card mounting spacer
C Option Card
Option Clip
(To prevent raising of
C and D Option Cards)
D Option Card
3CN
D Option Card connector D Option Card mounting spacer
Fig 2.16 Mounting Option Cards
2-29
2-30
Digital Operator and 3
Modes
This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of
operating modes and switching between modes.
LED Monitor for JVOP-163 ...........................................3-2

Digital Operator.............................................................3-3
uInverter Modes............................................................3-5
LED Monitor for JVOP-163
LED Monitor
Indicators the operation status by the combination of the LED displays (Lights up, Blink, and Off) at RUN,
DS1, and DS2.
The LED pattern is as follows at each mode.
Operation Mode Indicators

RUN: Lights up during inverter run, Off if the inverter is
stopped
DS1: Drive Status 1
DS2: Drive Status 2
The combination of the three LEDs Run, DS1 and DS2
indicates the drive status.
Drive Status Indications
Alarm Indications
Fault Indications
Note: When a combination of LED pattern different from above table occurs, it is CPF00 or CPF01 Fault.
LED Display when the Power is ON

Normal operation: The figure below shows the LED display when the drive is ready and no FWD/REV
signal is acticve
RUN DS1 DS2 POWER
Alarm: The figure below shows an example of the LED display when a minor fault occurs.
Refer to Chapter 6 and take appropriate countermeasures.
RUN DS1 DS2 POWER
Fault: The figure below shows an example of the LED display when an OV or UV fault has
occured
RUN DS1 DS2 POWER
3-2
Digital Operator
Digital Operator
This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.
Digital Operator Display

The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below.
Drive Mode Indicators

FWD: Lit when there is a forward run command input.
REV: Lit when there is a reverse run command input.
Frequency Ref SEQ: Lit when the run command from the control
circuit terminal is enabled.
REF: Lit when the frequency reference from control
circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.
ALARM: Lit when an error or alarm has occurred.
Data Display
Displays monitor data, constant numbers, and settings.
Mode Display (Displayed at upper left of data display.)

DRIVE: Lit in Drive Mode.
QUICK: Lit in Quick Programming Mode.
3
ADV: Lit in Advanced Programming Mode.
VERIFY: Lit in Verify Mode.
A. TUNE: Lit in Autotuning Mode.
Keys
Execute operations such as setting user constants,

monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.
Fig 3.1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
Digital Operator Keys

The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1 Key Functions

Key Name Function
Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and
LOCAL/REMOTE Key control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE).
This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting user constant o2-01.
MENU Key Selects menu items (modes).
ESC Key Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed.
Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the
JOG Key
Digital Operator.
3-3
Table 3.1 Key Functions (Continued)
Key Name Function
Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being
FWD/REV Key
operated from the Digital Operator.
Sets the number of digits for user constant settings.

Shift/RESET Key
Also acts as the Reset Key when a fault has occurred.
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and increments set
Increment Key values.
Used to move to the next item or data.
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and decrements set
Decrement Key values.
Used to move to the previous item or data.
Pressed to enter menu items, user constants, and set values.

DATA/ENTER Key
Also used to switch from one display to another.
Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by

RUN Key
the Digital Operator.
Stops Inverter operation.

STOP Key This Key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control
circuit terminal by setting user constant o2-02.
Note Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to using the Key names listed in the above table.
There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators
will light and flash to indicate operating status.
The RUN Key indicator will flash and the STOP Key indicator will light during initial excitation of the
dynamic brake. The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the Inverter status is
shown in the Fig 3.2.
Inverter output frequency

RUN STOP
STOP
Frequency setting
RUN
STOP
Lit Blinking Not lit
Fig 3.2 RUN and STOP Indicators
3-4
Digital Operator
Inverter Modes
The Inverter's parameters and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it easier to
read and set parameters.The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes.
The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the Table 3.2.
Table 3.2 Modes

Mode Primary function(s)
Use this mode to start/stop the inverter, to monitor values such as the frequency ref-
Drive mode
erences or output current and for displaying fault information or the fault history.
Quick programming mode Use this mode to read and set the basic parameters.
Advanced programming mode Use this mode to reference and set all parameters.
Use this mode to read/set parameters that have been changed from their factory-set
Verify mode
values.
Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor data in the vector control
Autotuning mode* modes. The motor data are measured/calculated and set automatically.
This mode can also be used to measure only the motor line-to-line resistance.
* Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating in the vector control modes.
3
3-5
Switching Modes
The mode selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed. Press the MENU key from the mode
selection display to switch through the modes in sequence.
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter a mode and to switch from a monitor display to the setting display.
Display at Startup
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
U1- 01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Mode Selection MENU

Monitor Display Setting Display
Display
-DRIVE- -DRIVE- Rdy -DRIVE- Rdy -DRIVE- Rdy

** Main Menu ** Monitor RESET Frequency Ref Frequency Ref
U1 - 01=60.00Hz U1- 01=60.00Hz U1- 01=060.00Hz
Operation U1-02=60.00Hz U1-02=60.00Hz (0.00 ~ 60.00)
U1-03=10.05A U1-03=10.05A " 00.00Hz "
ESC ESC ESC
MENU
-QUICK- -QUICK- -QUICK-

** Main Menu ** Control Method Control Method
Quick Setting A1-02=3 *3* A1-02= 3 *3*
Close Loop Vector Close Loop Vector
ESC ESC
MENU
-ADV- -ADV- -ADV- -ADV-

RESET
** Main Menu ** Initialization Select Language Select Language
Programming A1 - 00=0 A1- 00 =0 *0* A1- 00= 0 *0*
Select Language English English
ESC ESC ESC
MENU
-VERIFY- -VERIFY- The constant number will be displayed if a

** Main Menu ** parameter has been changed. Press the
None Modified
Modified Consts DATA/ENTER key to enable the change.
ESC
MENU
-A.TUNE- -A.TUNE- -A.TUNE-

** Main Menu ** Tuning Mode Sel Tuning Mode Sel
T1- 01=0 1 *0* T1- 01= 0 *0*
Auto-Tuning Standard Tuning Standard Tuning
"0" "0"
ESC ESC
Fig 3.3 Mode Transitions
To run the inverter after viewing/changing parameters press the MENU key and the DATA/ENTER key in sequence to
enter the Drive mode. A Run command is not accepted as long as the drive is in any other mode.
3-6
Digital Operator
Drive Mode
The Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated. All monitor parameters (U1-) as well
as fault information and the fault history can be displayed in this mode
When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, the frequency can be changed from the frequency setting display
using the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys. The parameter will be written and the display returns
to the Monitor display.
Example Operations
Example key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure.
Display at Startup
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
U1- 01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Mode Selection MENU

Monitor Display Frequency Setting Display
Display
A B 1 2
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
-DRIVE-
Monitor
U1 - 01=60.00Hz
Rdy
RESET
-DRIVE-
Frequency Ref
U1- 01=60.00Hz
Rdy -DRIVE-
Frequency Ref
U1 - 01= 050.00Hz
Rdy 3
Operation U1-02=60.00Hz U1-02=60.00Hz (0.00 ~ 60.00)
U1-03=10.05A ESC U1-03=10.05A " 00.00Hz "
ESC
ESC
MENU
The Frequency Setting

-DRIVE- Rdy -DRIVE- Rdy
-QUICK- Monitor RESET Output Freq Display will not be
** Main Menu ** U1 - 02=60.00Hz U1- 02=60.00Hz displayed when using an
U1-03=10.05A U1-03=10.05A
Quick Setting U1-04= 2 U1-04= 2 analog reference.
ESC
MENU
-DRIVE- Rdy RESET -DRIVE- Rdy
The fault name will be displayed
Monitor No of Travels if the DATA/ENTER key is pressed
-ADV- U1 - 55 = 11 U1- 55 = 11
** Main Menu ** while a constant is being displayed
U1-01=60.00Hz U1-01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz U1-02=60.00Hz for which a fault code is being
Programming ESC
displayed.
1 2
MENU
3 4
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu ** -DRIVE- Rdy -DRIVE- Rdy
Fault Trace RESET Current Fault U2 - 01= OC
Modified Consts U2 - 01=OC U2 - 01 = OC
U2-02= OV U2-02=OV Over Current
U2-03=60.00Hz ESC
U2-03=60.00Hz ESC
MENU
-A.TUNE-
-DRIVE- Rdy -DRIVE- Rdy Rdy
** Main Menu ** Fault Trace Last Fault
RESET
U2 - 02= OV
Auto-Tuning U2 - 02 = OV U2 - 02 = OV
U3-03=60.00Hz U3-03=60.00Hz DC Bus Overvolt
U3-04=60.00Hz ESC
U3-04=60.00Hz ESC
3 4
5 6
-DRIVE- Rdy -DRIVE- Rdy Rdy
Fault History RESET Last Fault U3 - 01= OC
U3 - 01= OC U3 - 01 = OC
U3-02= OV U3-02=OV Over Current
U3-03= OH ESC
U3-03=OH ESC
-DRIVE- Rdy Rdy Rdy

-DRIVE-
Fault Message 2 RESET
Fault Message 2 U3 - 02= OV
U3 - 02 = OV U3 - 02 = OV DC Bus Overvolt
U3-03= OH U3-03= OH
U3-04= UV ESC U3-04= UV ESC
5 6
A B
Fig 3.4 Operations in Drive Mode
3-7
Note: 1. When changing the display with the Increment / Decrement keys, the next display after the one for the last parameter number will be the one for the
first parameter number and vice versa. For example, the next display after the one for U1-01 will be U1-40. This is indicated in the figures by the
letters A and B and the numbers 1 to 6.
2. The display for the first monitor parameter (frequency reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON. The monitor item displayed at startup
can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display.
Quick Programming Mode

In quick programming mode, the basic parameters required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and
set.
The parameters can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET
keys to change the frequency. The parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when
the DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 4, User Parameters for details on the parameters displayed in quick programming mode.
Example Operations
Example key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
A B
MENU
-QUICK- -QUICK- -QUICK-

** Main Menu ** Control Method Control Method
A1-02 = 3 *3* A1-02 = 3 *3*
Quick Setting Close loop Vector Close loop Vector
"3" "0"
ESC ESC
MENU
-QUICK- -QUICK-
Reference Source Reference Source
-ADV- b1-01 = 0 *0* b1-01 = 0 *0*
** Main Menu ** Operator Operator
"0" "0"
Programming ESC
-QUICK- -QUICK-
MENU Run Source Run Source
b1-02 = 1 *1* b1-02 = 1 *1*
Terminals Terminals
-VERIFY- "1" "1"
** Main Menu ** ESC
Modified Consts
-QUICK- -QUICK-
MENU Mtr Rated Power Mtr Rated Power
E2-11 = 4.00kW E2-11 = 004.00kW
(0.00 ~ 650.00) (0.00 ~ 650.00)
-A.TUNE- "4.00kW
" "4.00kW
"
** Main Menu ** ESC
Auto-Tuning
-QUICK- -QUICK-
MOL Fault Select MOL Fault Select
L1-01=1 *1* L1-01 = 1 *1*
Std Fan Cooled Std Fan Cooled
"1" "1"
ESC
-QUICK- -QUICK-
StallP Decel Sel StallP Decel Sel
L3-04 = 0 *0* L3-04 = 0 *0*
Disabled Disabled
"0" "0"
ESC
A B
Fig 3.5 Operations in Quick Programming Mode
3-8
Digital Operator
Advanced Programming Mode

In advanced programming mode all Inverter parameters can be monitored and set.
A parameter can be changed from the setting displays using the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET
keys. The parameter will be saved and the display will return to monitor display when the DATA/ENTER key
is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 4, User Parameters for details on the parameters.
Example Operations
Example key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure.
A B 1 2
-ADV- -ADV- -ADV- -ADV-

** Main Menu ** Initialization RESET Select Language Select Language
A1-00=0 A1- 00 = 0 *0* A1-02 = 0 *0*
Programming English English
Select Language "0" "0"
3
ESC ESC ESC
MENU
-ADV- -ADV- -ADV-

RESET
-VERIFY- Initialization Control Method Control Method
** Main Menu **
A1- 02 = 3 A1- 02 = 3 *3* A1-02 = 3 *3*
Close loop vector Close loop vector
Modified Consts Control Method "3" ESC
"3"
ESC
MENU 1 2
-A.TUNE- 3 4
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning -ADV- -ADV- -ADV-
RESET
Accel/Decel Accel Time 1 Accel Time 1
C1- 01 = 3.00 sec C1- 01 = 3.00 sec C1- 01 = 003.0 sec
MENU Accel Time 1 (0.00 ~ 600.00) (0.00 ~ 600.00)
"3.00sec" "3.00sec"
.
ESC ESC
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
-ADV- -ADV- -ADV-
RESET
Operation Accel/Decel Accel Time 2 Accel Time 2
C1- 02 = 3.00 sec C1- 02 = 3.00 sec C1- 02 = 003.0 sec
Accel Time 1 (0.00 ~ 600.00) (0.00 ~ 600.00)
MENU ESC
"3.00sec" ESC "3.00sec"
-QUICK- 3 4
** Main Menu ** A B
Quick Setting
MENU
Fig 3.6 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode
3-9
Setting Parameters
Here the procedure to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 3.0 s to 4.0 s is shown.
Table 3.3 Setting Parameters in Advanced Programming Mode

Step
Digital Operator Display Description
No.
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
1 U1- 01=60.00Hz Power supply turned ON.
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
2
Operation
-QUICK-
** Main Menu ** Press the MENU key 3 times to enter the advanced programming
3
Quick Setting mode.
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
4
Programming
-ADV-
Initialization
5 Press the DATA/ENTER to access the monitor display.
A1-00=0
Select Language
-ADV-
Accel / Decel Press the Increment or Decrement key to display the parameter
6 C1-00 = 3.0 sec
Accel Time 1
C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
-ADV-
Accel Time 1 Press the DATA/ENTER key to access the setting display. The
7 C1-01 = 0 030.0sec
(0.0 ~ 6000.0) current setting value of C1-01 is displayed.
"3.00 sec"
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
8 C1-01 = 000 30.0sec Press the Shift/RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right.
(0.0 ~ 6000.0)
"3.00 sec"
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
9 C1-01 = 0013 0.0sec Press the Increment key to change set value to 40.00 s.
(0.0 ~ 6000.0)
"3.00 sec"
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
10 C1-01 = 0014 0.0sec Press the DATA/ENTER key to save the set data.
(0.0 ~ 6000.0)
"3.00 sec"
-ADV-
“Entry Accepted” is displayed for 1 sec after pressing the
11 Entry Accepted
DATA/ENTER key.
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
12 C1-01
01 = 4.0 sec The display returns to the monitor display for C1-01.
(0.0 ~ 6000.0)
"10.0 sec"
3-10
Digital Operator
Verify Mode
The Verify mode is used to display any parameters that have been changed from their default settings in a pro-
gramming mode or by autotuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.
The parameter A1-02 is the only parameter from the A1- group, which will be displayed in the modified
contsant list if it has been changed before. The other parameters will not be diplayed, even if they are different
from the default setting.
In the verify mode, the same procedures can be used to change settings as they are used in the programming
mode. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change a setting. When the DATA/ENTER
key is pressed the parameter setting are written and the display returns to the Monitor display.
Example Operations
In the example below the following settings have been changed from their default settings:
• b1-01 (Reference Selection)
• C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1)
• E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting)
• E2-01 (Motor Rated Current).
3
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
A B
MENU
-VERIFY- -VERIFY- -VERIFY-

** Main Menu ** Reference Source Reference Source
Modified Consts b1-01=0 *0* b1-01= 0 *0*
Terminals
"1" Terminals
ESC "1"
ESC
MENU
-VERIFY- -VERIFY-
Accel Time 1 Accel Time 1
-A.TUNE- C1-01=200.0sec C1-01= 0 200.0sec
** Main Menu ** (0.0 ~ 6000.0) (0.0 ~ 6000.0)
"3.0 sec" "3.0 sec"
Auto-Tuning ESC
-VERIFY- -VERIFY-
MENU Input Voltage Input Voltage
E1-01=190VAC E1-01= 190VAC
(155~255) (155~255)
-DRIVE- "200VAC" "200VAC"
** Main Menu ** ESC
Operation
-VERIFY- -VERIFY-
Motor Rated FLA Motor Rated FLA
E2-01= 2.00A E2-01= 2.00A
MENU (0.32~6.40) (0.32~6.40)
"1.90A" "1.90A"
ESC
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
A B
MENU
Fig 3.7 Operations in Verify Mode
3-11
Autotuning Mode
Autotuning automatically measures and sets the required motor data in order to achieve the maximum perfor-
mance. Always perform autotuning before starting operation when using the vector control modes.
When V/f control has been selected, only stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance can be selected.
When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, and Open Loop or Closed Loop Vector Control shall
be used perform stationary autotuning.
Example of Operation
Enter the motor rated output power (in kW), rated voltage, rated current, rated frequency, rated speed and
number of poles specified on the nameplate of the motor and then press the RUN key. The motor is automati-
cally run and the measured motor data are set in the E2- parameters.
Always set the above items. Otherwise autotuning cannot be started, e.g. it cannot be started from the motor
rated voltage input display.
A parameter can be changed from the setting displays using the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET
keys. The parameter will be saved when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed.
The following example shows autotuning for Open Loop Vector Control.
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU

** Main Menu ** Tuning Mode Sel Tuning Mode Sel
T1- 01 =0 *0* 01 = 0 *0*
Auto-Tuning Standard Tuning Standard Tuning
"0" "0"
ESC ESC
MENU
-A.TUNE- -A.TUNE-
Rated Frequency Rated Frequency
-DRIVE- T1- 05 = 60.0Hz T1-05 = 060.0Hz
** Main Menu ** (0.0~400.0) (0.0~400.0)
"60.0Hz" "60.0Hz"
Operation ESC

MENU Number of Poles Number of Poles Tune Proceeding
T1- 06 = 4 T1-06 = 0 4 48.0Hz/10.5A
(2~48) (2~48)
-QUICK- "4" "4" START GOAL
** Main Menu ** ESC
Quick Setting
-A.TUNE- Rdy RUN -A.TUNE- -A.TUNE-
Auto-Tuning Tune Proceeding Tune Proceeding
0.0Hz/0.0A 48.0Hz/10.5A
MENU Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key START GOAL Tune Successful
-ADV- STOP
** Main Menu ** The display will
Programming automatically -A.TUNE- -A.TUNE-
Tune Aborted Tune Successful
change depending
MENU
on the status of STOP key
autotuning.
Fig 3.8 Operation in Autotuning Mode
If a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to Chapter 6, Troubleshooting .
3-12
User Parameters
This chapter describes all user parameters that can be set in the Inverter.
4
User Parameter Descriptions.......................................4-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ..........4-3
User Parameter Tables ................................................4-8
User Parameter Descriptions
This section describes the contents of the user parameter tables.
Description of User Parameter Tables

User parameter tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as
an example.
Control Methods MEMO-
Name Change
Param- BUS
Setting Factory during
eter
Display Description Open Closed Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f Loop Loop Regis-
tion Vector Vecttor ter
Sets the frequency reference
input method.
0: Digital Operator/Monitor
Reference 1: Control circuit terminal
b1-01 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q 180H -
selection (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communica-
tions
3: Option Card
• Parameter Number: The number of the user parameter.

• Name: The name of the user parameter.
• Description: Details on the function or settings of the user parameter.
• Display: The display shown in the Digital Operator JVOP-160.
• Setting Range: The setting range for the user parameter.
• Factory Setting: The factory setting (each control method has its own factory setting.
Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is
changed.)
Refer to page page 4-58, Factory Settings that Change with the Con-
trol Method (A1-02) for factory settings that are changed by setting
the control method.
• Change during Operation: Indicates whether the parameter can be changed or not while the
Inverter is in operation.
Yes: Changes are possible during operation.
No: Changes are not possible during operation.
• Control Methods: Indicates the control methods in which the user parameter can be
monitored or set.
Q: The item can be monitored and set as well in quick program-
ming mode as in advanced programming mode.
A: The item can be monitored and set in advanced programming
mode only.
No: The item cannot be monitored or set in this control method.
• MEMOBUS Register: The register number used for MEMOBUS communications.
• Page: Reference page for more detailed information about the parameter.
4-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels

The following figure shows the Digital Operator/Monitor display hierarchy for the Inverter.
No. Function Page

U1 Status Monitor Parameters 4-50
U2 Fault Trace 4-55
MENU Drive Mode
U3 Fault History 4-57
Inverter can be operated and A1 Initialize Mode 4-8

its status can be displayed. A2 User-specified Setting Mode 4-9
b1 Operation Mode Selections 4-10
b2 DC Injection Braking 4-10
b6 Dwell Functions 4-11
C1 Acceleration/Deceleration 4-12
C2 S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration 4-13
Quick Programming Mode
C3 Motor Slip Compensation 4-14
Minimum parameters required
C4 Torque Compensation 4-15
for operation can be monitored
or set.
C5 Speed Control (ASR) 4-16
C6 Carrier Frequency 4-17
d1 Preset Reference 4-18
d6 Field Weakening 4-19
E1 V/f Pattern 4-20
E2 Motor Setup 4-21
Advanced Programming Mode F1 PG Option Setup 4-23
F4 Analog Momitor Card 4-25
All parameters can be moni-
F5 Digital Output Card 4-26
tored or set.
F6 Serial Communications Settings 4-27
H1 Multi-function Digital Inputs 4-28
H2
H3
H5
Multi-function Digital Outputs
Multi-function Analog Inputs
MEMOBUS Communications
4-29
4-31 4
L1 Motor Overload 4-34
Verify Mode L2 Power Loss Ridethrough 4-34
Parameters changed from the L3 Stall Prevention 4-35
default settings can be moni- L4 Reference Detection 4-36
tored or set. L5 Feed Restart 4-36
L6 Torque Detection 4-37
L7 Torque Limits 4-38
L8 Hardware Protection 4-39
N2 Automatic Frequency Regulator 4-40
N5 Feed Forward
o1 Monitor Selection 4-41
o2 Digital Operator/Monitor Functions 4-42
Autotuning Mode 4-45
o3 Copy Function
S1 Brake Sequence 4-45
Automatically sets motor
S2 Slip Compensation for lift 4-48
parameters for open-loop vec-
tor control or measures the S3 Lift Specific Function 4-48
line-to-line resistance for V/f
T Motor Autotuning 4-49
control.
4-3
User Parameters Setable in Quick Programming Mode
The minimum user parameters required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming
mode. The user parameters displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and
all other user parameters, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.
Name Change Control Methods MEMO-

Param- BUS
Setting Factory during Open Closed
eter Description Range Setting Opera- Regis-
Number V/f Loop Loop
Display tion Vector Vector ter
Control
method Sets the control method for the Inverter.
0: V/f control
A1-02 selection 0 to 3 3 No Q Q Q 102H
2: Open-Loop Vector control
Control 3: Closed Loop Vector control
Method
Acceleration
time 1 Sets the acceleration time to accelerate
C1-01 from 0 Hz to the maximum output fre- 200H
Accel quency.
Time 1 0.0 to
6000.0 3.0 s Yes Q Q Q
Deceleration *1
time 1 Sets the deceleration time to decelerate
C1-02 from the maximum output frequency to 0 201H
Decel Hz.
Time 1
S-curve char-
acteristic
time at accel- 0.00 to
C2-01 eration start 0.50 s No Q Q Q 20BH
2.50
SCrv Acc @
Start
S-curve char-
acteristic
time at accel- 0.00 to
C2-02 eration end 0.50 s No Q Q Q 20CH
2.50
SCrv Acc @
End
S-curve char-
acteristic
time at decel- When the S-curve characteristic time is 0.00 to
C2-03 eration start set, the accel/decel times will increase by 0.50 s No Q Q Q 20DH
2.50
only half of the S-curve characteristic
SCrv Dec @ times at start and end.
Start
S-curve char-
acteristic
time at decel- 0.00 to
C2-04 eration end 0.50 s No Q Q Q 20EH
2.50
SCrv Dec @
End
S-curve
Characteris-
tic time
0.00 to
C2-05 below level- 0.50 s No Q Q Q 232H
ing speed 2.50
S-curve @
leveling
ASR propor-
tional (P)
Sets the proportional gain of the speed 0.00 to 40.00
C5-01 gain 1 Yes No No Q 21BH
loop (ASR) 300.00 *3
ASR P Gain
1
4-4

Param- BUS
ASR integral
(I) time 1 Sets the integral time of the speed loop 0.000 to 0.500 s
C5-02 Yes No No Q 21CH
ASR I Time (ASR). 10.000 *2
1
ASR propor-
tional (P) Usually changing this setting is not nec-
essary. 0.00 to 20.00
C5-03 gain 2 Yes No No Q 21DH
300.00 *3
ASR P Gain P,I
2 P = C5-01
I = C5-02
ASR integral
P = C5-03
(I) time 2 I = C5-04
0.000 to 0.500 s
C5-04 Yes No No Q 21EH
ASR I Time 0 E1-04 Motor 10.000 *3
speed (Hz)
2
ASR delay Sets the filter time constant; the time
time from the speed loop to the torque com- 0.000 to 0.004
C5-06 No No No Q 220H
ASR Delay mand output. Usually changing this set- 0.500 ms
Time ting is not necessary.
ASR propor-
tional (P) Usually changing this setting is not nec-
essary. 0.00 to 40.00
4
C5-09 gain 3 Yes No No Q 22EH
300.00 *3
ASR P Gain P,I
3 P = C5-01
I = C5-02
ASR integral P=C5-09
P = C5-03
(I) time 3 II=P5-10
= C5-04
0.000 to 0.500 s
C5-10 Yes No No Q 231H
ASR I Time 0 E1-04 Motor 10.000 *3
speed (Hz)
3
Vn reference Sets the frequency reference when multi-
50.00
d1-09 step speed command 4 is ON for a multi- Yes Q Q Q 288H
Vn reference function input. Hz
Inspection Sets the frequency reference when multi-

0 to 25.00
d1-14 reference step speed commands 1, 3, and 4 are ON Yes Q Q Q 28FH
120.00 Hz
Inspection ref for multi-function inputs.
Sets the frequency reference when the
d1-17 Vl reference leveling reference selection, FJOG com- 4.00 Hz Yes Q Q Q 292H
mand, or RJOG command is ON.
Input volt-
age setting Sets the inverter input voltage. This set 155 to
200 V
E1-01 value will be the basis for the protection 255 No Q Q Q 300H
Input *2
functions. *2
Voltage
4-5
Param- BUS
Max. output
frequency
40.0 to
E1-04 (FMAX) 60.0 Hz No Q Q Q 303H
120.0
Max
Freqency
Max. voltage 0.0 to
200.0 V
E1-05 (VMAX) 255.0 No Q Q Q 304H
*2
Max Voltage *2
Base fre-
quency (FA) 0.0 to 60.0 Hz
E1-06 No Q Q Q 305H
Base Fre- 120.0 *3
quency
Mid. output
frequency 0.0 to
11.0 V
E1-08 voltage (VB) 255 No Q Q No 307H
*1 *2
Mid voltage *2
A
Min. output
frequency
0.0 to 0.5 Hz
E1-09 (FMIN) No Q A 308H
120.0 *3 Q
Min Fre-
quency
Min. output
frequency 0.0 to
2.0 V
E1-10 voltage 255.0 No Q Q No 309H
(VMIN) *1 *2
*2
Min Voltage
Motor rated Sets the motor rated current in Amps.
current 1.75 to
This set value becomes the base value for 14.00 A
E2-01 35.00 No Q Q Q 30EH
Mtr Rated motor protection and torque limit. It is an *5
*6
Power input data for autotuning.
Motor rated
Sets the motor rated slip.
slip This set value will become the reference
0.00 to 2.73 Hz
E2-02 value for the slip compensation. No Q Q Q 30FH
Motor Rated This parameter is automatically set dur- 20.00 *5
Slip ing autotuning.
Motor no-
load current Sets the motor no-load current. 0.00 to
4.50 A
E2-03 This parameter is automatically set dur- 13.99 No Q Q Q 310H
No-Load *5
ing autotuning. *5
Current
Number of
motor poles Sets the number of motor poles. It is an
E2-04 2 to 48 4 No No No Q 311H
Number of input data for autotuning.
Poles
Motor line-
to-line resis- Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance. 0.000
0.771 Ω
E2-05 tance This parameter is automatically set dur- to No Q Q Q 312H
*5
Term Resis- ing autotuning. 65.000
tance
Motor rated
output power Sets the rated output power of the motor. 0.00 to 3.70
E2-11 This parameter is an input data for auto- No Q Q Q 318H
Mtr Rated 650.00 *5
tuning.
Power
PG constant
Sets the number of PG pulses per revolu- 0 to
F1-01 PG Pulses/ 1024 No No No Q 380H
tion 60000
Rev
4-6

Param- BUS
PG rotation 0: Phase A leads with forward run
command. (Phase B leads with
reverse run command.)
F1-05 PG Rotation 0 or 1 0 No No No Q 384H
1: Phase B leads with forward run
Sel command. (Phase A leads with
reverse run command.)
Motor pro- Set to enable or disable the motor over-
tection selec- load protection function using the elec-
tion tronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: Protection for general purpose motor
(fan cooled)
2: Protection for frequency converter
motor (external cooled)
3: Protection for special vector control
L1-01 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q 480H
motor
MOL Select When the inverter power supply is turned
off, the thermal value is reset, so even if
this parameter is set to 1, protection may
not be effective.
When several motors are connected to
one Inverter, set to 0 and ensure that each
motor is equipped with a protection
device. 4
* 1. The setting ranges for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10 (Acceleration/deceleration Time Setting Unit). If C1-10 is set to
0, the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).
* 2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 3. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Close Loop Vector control factory settings are given.)
* 4. After autotuning, E1-13 will contain the same value as E1-05.
* 5. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 3.7 kW is given.)
* 6. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 3.7 kW is given.)
4-7
User Parameter Tables
A: Setup Settings
Initialize Mode: A1

Param-
eter Description Range Setting Opera-
BUS Page
Display tion Vector Vector
Register
Language Used to select the language
selection for displayed on the Digital Oper-
Digital Oper- ator/Monitor (JVOP-160 only).
ator/Monitor 0: English
display 1: Japanese
2: German
A1-00 0 to 6 0 Yes A A A 100H –
3: French
4: Italian
Select 5: Spanish
Language 6: Portuguese
This parameter is not changed
by the initialize operation.
Used to set the parameter
Parameter access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only
access level
(Monitoring drive mode
and setting A1-01 and A1-
04.)
1: Used to select user
parameters (Only
A1-01 0 to 2 2 Yes Q Q Q 101H 5-60
parameters set in A2-01 to
A2-32 can be read and set.)
Access Level 2: Advanced
(Parameters can be read
and set in both, quick
programming mode (Q)
and advanced
programming mode (A).)
Control Used to select the control
method method for the Inverter
selection 0: V/f control
A1-02 2: Open loop vector 0 to 3 3 No Q Q Q 102H –
Control 3: Closed Loop Vector
Method This parameter is not changed
by the initialize operation.
Used to initialize the parame-
Initialize ters using the specified
method.
0: No initializing
1110: Initializes using the 0 to
A1-03 0 No A A A 103H –
user parameters 2220
Init Parame-
2220: Initializes using a
ters
two-wire sequence.
(Initializes to the
factory setting.)
Password input when a pass-
Password word has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects
some parameters of the initial-
ize mode.
0 to
A1-04 If the password is changed, 0 No A A A 104H 5-60
9999
Enter Pass- A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to
word A2-32 parameters can no
longer be changed. (Program-
ming mode parameters can be
changed.)
4-8

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Password Used to set a four digit number

setting as the password.
Usually this parameter is not
displayed. When the Password 0 to
A1-05 0 No A A A 105H 5-60
Select Pass- (A1-04) is displayed, hold 9999
word down the RESET key and
press the Menu key. The pass-
word will be displayed.
User-set Parameters: A2
The parameters set by the user are listed in the following table.

Param- BUS
Page
Number V/f Loop Loop Regis-
User speci- Used to select the function for
fied parame- each of the user specified
A2-01 ters
parameters. User parameters are b1-01 to 106H to
to – No A A A 5-61
the only accessable parameters S3-01 125H
4
A2-32 User Param 1
if Parameter Access Level is set
to 32 to user parameters (A1-01=1)
4-9
Application Parameters: b
Operation Mode Selections: b1

Param-
BUS Page
Number Display V/f Loop Loop
Register
tion Vector Vector
Reference Sets the frequency reference
source selec- input method.
tion 0: Digital Operator/Monitor
1: Control circuit terminal 5-5
b1-01 0 to 3 0 No Q Q Q 180H
(analog input) 5-42
Reference 2: MEMOBUS communica-
Source tions
3: Option Card
RUN com- Sets the run command input
mand source method.
selection 0: Digital Operator/Monitor
1: Control circuit terminal
5-4
b1-02 (digital multifunktion 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q 181H
5-42
inputs)
Run Source 2: MEMOBUS communica-
tions
3: Option Card
Control input Used to set the responsiveness
scan of the control inputs (forward/
reverse and multi-function
inputs.)
b1-06 0 or 1 1 No A A A 185H –
Cntl Input 0: Fast reading
Scans 1: Normal reading (Can be
used for possible
malfunction due to noise.)
Run com- Used to set an operation prohi-
mand selec- bition in programming modes.
tion in 0: Operation prohibited.
program- 1: Operate permitted
b1-08 ming modes (Disabled when Digital 0 or 1 0 No A A A 187H –
Operator/Monitor is the
RUN CMD selected Run command
at PRG source
(b1-02 = 0)).
DC Injection Braking: b2

Name Change
Control Methods MEMO-
Param- BUS
Page
Number Display V/f Loop Loop Regis-
tion Vector Vector ter
Magnetic
flux compen-
sation vol- Sets the magnetic flux com-
0 to
b2-08 ume pensation as a percentage of 0% No no A no 190H –
1000
the no-load currnet.
Field Comp
4-10
Timer Function: b4
User constants for timer functions are shown in the following table.
Change Control Methods

Con- Open
MEMO-
Setting Factory during Closed
stant Name Description Range Setting Loop BUS Page
Number Opera- V/f Loop
Vec-
Vector
Register
tion tor
Sets the timer function output
ON-delay time (dead band) for
Timer func-
the timer function input, in 1- 0.0 to
b4-01 tion ON- 0.0 s No A A A 1A3H –
second units. 3000.0
delay time
Enabled when a timer function
is set in H1- or H2-.
Sets the timer function output
OFF-delay time (dead band) for
Timer func-
the timer function input, in 1- 0.0 to
b4-02 tion OFF- 0.0 s No A A A 1A4H –
second units. 3000.0
delay time
Enabled when a timer function
is set in H1- or H2-.
Dwell Functions: b6
Param Name Change Control Methods MEMO-

eter
Num-
ber Display
Description Setting Factory during
Range Setting Opera-
tion
V/f
Open Closed
Loop Loop
Vector Vector
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
4
Dwell fre-
quency at
0.0 to
b6-01 start 0.0 Hz No A A A 1B6H 5-20
120.0
Dwell Ref
@ Start
Dwell time
Run command ON
at start OFF
Output frequency 0.0 to
b6-02 Dwell 0.0 s No A A A 1B7H 5-20
10.0
Time
@ Start
b6-01 b6-03 Time
Dwell fre- b6-02 b6-04
quency at
0.0 to
b6-03 stop 0.0 Hz No A A A 1B8H 5-20
120.0
Dwell Ref The dwell function can be used to
@ Stop hold the output frequency
temporarily when driving a motor
Dwell time
with a heavy load.
at stop
0.0 to
b6-04 Dwell 0.0 s No A A A 1B9H 5-20
10.0
Time
@ Stop
4-11
Tuning Parameters: C
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Acceleration Sets the acceleration time to
C1-01 time 1 accelerate from 0 Hz to the Yes Q Q Q 200H 5-17
Accel Time 1 maximum output frequency.
Deceleration Sets the deceleration time to
C1-02 time 1 decelerate from the maximum Yes Q Q Q 201H 5-17
Decel Time 1 output frequency to 0 Hz.
Acceleration Sets the acceleration time
time 2 when the multi-function input
C1-03 Yes A A A 202H 5-17
Accel Time 2 “accel/decel time 1” is set to
ON.
Deceleration Sets the deceleration time

C1-04 Yes A A A 203H 5-17
“accel/decel time 1” is set to
Decel Time 2 ON.

C1-05 No A A A 204H 5-17
Accel Time 3 “accel/decel time 2” is set to 0.00 to
ON. 600.00 3.0 s
*1
C1-06 No A A A 205H 5-17
“accel/decel time 2” is set to
Decel Time 3 ON.

C1-07 “accel/decel time 1” and No A A A 206H 5-17
Accel Time 4 “accel/decel time 2” are set to
ON.
C1-08 “accel/decel time 1” and No A A A 207H 5-17
Decel Time 4 “accel/decel time 2” are set to
ON.
Emergency Sets the deceleration time
stop time when the multi-function input
C1-09 No A A A 208H 5-17
Fast Stop “Emergency (fast) stop” is set
Time to ON.
Accel/decel
time setting
0: 0.01-second units
C1-10 unit 0 or 1 1 No A A A 209H 5-17
1: 0.1-second units
Acc/Dec
Units
4-12

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Sets the frequency for auto-
Accel/decel
matic acceleration/decelera-
time switch-
ing fre-tion switching.
quency If the output frequency is
below the set frequency:
Accel/decel time 4 0.0 to
C1-11 0.0 Hz No Q Q Q 20AH 5-17
If the output freuquency is 120.0
Acc/Dec SW above the set frequency:
Freq Accel/decel time 1
The multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” or “accel/
decel time 2” has priority.
* 1. The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depends on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/
deceleration times becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
S-Curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
Param- Name Change Control Methods MEMO-

eter Setting Factory during Open Closed BUS
Num-
Description Range Setting Opera-
Page
V/f Loop Loop Regis-
ber Display tion Vector Vector ter
S-curve
characteris- 4
tic time at
0.00 to
C2-01 accelera- 0.50 s No Q Q Q 20BH –
tion start 2.50
SCrv Acc
@ Start
S-curve
characteris-
tic time at
0.00 to
C2-02 accelera- 0.50 s No Q Q Q 20CH –
tion end 2.50
SCrv Acc
@ End
S-curve
characteris-
tic time at When the S-curve characteristic time is
set, the accel/decel times will increase 0.00 to
C2-03 decelera- 0.50 s No Q Q Q 20DH –
tion start by only half of the S-curve characteris- 2.50
tic times at start and end.
SCrv Dec
@ Start
S-curve
characteris-
tic time at
0.00 to
C2-04 decelera- 0.50 s No Q Q Q 20EH –
tion end 2.50
SCrv Dec
@ End
S-curve
Character-
istic time
0.00 to
C2-05 below lev- 0.50 s No Q Q Q 232H –
eling speed 2.50
S-curve @
leveling
4-13
Motor Slip Compensation: C3

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Used to improve speed accu-
Slip compen- racy when operating with a
sation gain load.
Usually changing this setting is
not necessary.
Adjust this parameter under
0.0 to
C3-01 the following circumstances. 1.0* Yes A A A 20FH 5-26
2.5
Slip Comp • When motor speed is lower
Gain than the frequency reference
increase the set value.
• When motor speed is higher
than the frequency reference
decrease the set value.
Slip compen- Sets the Slip Compensation

sation delay delay time.
time Usually changing this setting is
not necessary.
Adjust this parameter under
0 to 2000 ms
C3-02 the following circumstances. No A A No 210H 5-26
10000 *
• Reduce the setting when
Slip Comp
Slip Compensation respon-
Time
siveness is low.
• When speed is not stable,
increase the setting.
Slip compen-
sation limit Sets the slip compensation 0 to
C3-03 limit as a percentage of motor 200% No A A No 211H 5-26
Slip Comp 250
rated slip.
Limit
Slip compen- 0: Disabled.
sation selec- 1: Enabled.
tion during When the slip compensation
regeneration during regeneration function
has been activated and regen-
C3-04 0 or 1 1 No A A No 212H 5-26
eration capacity increases
Slip Comp momentarily, it might be nec-
Regen essary to use a braking option
(braking resistor, braking resis-
tor unit or braking unit.)
Output volt-
age limit 0: Disabled.
operation 1: Enabled. (The motor flux
will be lowered
C3-05 selection 0 or 1 1 No No A A 213H 5-26
automatically when the
Output V output voltage become
limit saturated.)
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (The V/f control factory settings are given.)
4-14
Torque Compensation: C4

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Sets the torque compensation
gain.
Torque com- Usually changing this setting is
pensation not necessary.
gain Adjust it under the following
circumstances:
• When the cable is long
increase the set value.
• When the motor capacity is
smaller than the Inverter
capacity (Max. applicable
motor capacity), increase 0.00 to
C4-01 1.00 Yes A A No 215H 5-27
the set values. 2.50
• When the motor is oscillat-
Torq Comp ing, decrease the set values.
Gain Adjust the torque compensa-
tion gain so that at minimum
speed the output current does
not exceed the Inverter rated
output current.
4
Do not alter the torque com-
pensation gain from its default
(1.00) when using Open Loop
Vector control.
Torque com- The torque compensation
pensation delay time is set in ms units.
delay time Usually changing this setting is
constant not necessary.
Adjust it under the following
0 to 50 ms
C4-02 circumstances: No A A No 216H 5-27
10000 *
• When the motor is oscillat-
Torq Comp ing, increase the set values.
Time • When the responsiveness of
the motor is low, decrease
the set values.
Starting
torque com-
pensation
Sets the torque compensation 0.0 to
C4-03 (FWD) 0.0% No No A No 217H 5-27
value at start in FWD direction 200.0%
FTorqCmp
@ Start
Starting
torque com-
pensation
Sets the torque compensation -200.0%
C4-04 (REV) 0.0% No No A No 218H 5-27
value at start in REV direction to 0.0
RTorqCmp
@ Start
Starting
torque com-
pensation Sets starting torque start-up
time.
C4-05 time constant 0 to 200 10 ms No No A No 219H 5-27
When 0 ~ 4 ms is set, it is oper-
TorqCmpDe- ated without filter.
layT
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open loop vector control factory settings are given.)
4-15
Speed Control (ASR): C5
eter Setting Factory during Open Closed
Num-
BUS Page
Display V/f Loop Loop
Register
ber tion Vector Vector
ASR pro-
portional 0.00 to
Sets the proportional gain of the 40.00
C5-01 (P) gain 1 300.00 Yes No No Q 21BH 5-29
speed loop (ASR) *2
ASR P *1
Gain 1
ASR inte-
gral (I) time 0.000
Sets the integral time of the speed 0.500 s
C5-02 1 to Yes No No Q 21CH 5-29
loop (ASR). *2
ASR I 10.000
Time 1
ASR pro-
portional Usually changing this setting is not
0.00 to 20.00
C5-03 (P) gain 2 necessary. Yes No No Q 21DH 5-29
300.00 *2
ASR P
Gain 2 P,I
P = C5-01
I = C5-02
ASR inte-
gral (I) time P = C5-03
0.000
I = C5-04 0.500 s
C5-04 2 to Yes No No Q 21EH 5-29
0 E1-04 Motor *2
ASR I speed (Hz) 10.000
Time 2
ASR delay Sets the filter time constant; the time
time 0.000
from the speed loop to the torque 0.004
C5-06 to No No No Q 220H 5-29
ASR Delay command output. Usually changing 0.500
ms
Time this setting is not necessary.
ASR
switching Sets the frequency for switching
0.0 to
C5-07 frequency between Proportion Gain 1, 2 and 0.0 Hz No No No A 221H 5-29
120.0
ASR Gain Integral Time 1, 2.
SW Freq
ASR inte-
gral (I) Set the parameter to a small value to
prevent any radical load change. A 0 to
C5-08 limit 400% No No No A 222H 5-29
setting of 100% is equal to the maxi- 400
ASR I mum output frequency.
Limit
ASR pro-
portional Usually changing this setting is not
0.00 to 40.00
C5-09 (P) gain 3 necessary. Yes No No Q 22EH 5-29
300.00 *2
ASR P
Gain 3 P,I
P = C5-01
I = C5-02
ASR inte-
P=C5-09
gral (I) time P = C5-03
0.000
II=P5-10
= C5-04
0.500 s
C5-10 3 to Yes No No Q 231H 5-29
0 E1-04 Motor *2
ASR I speed (Hz) 10.000
Time 3
* 1. The setting range is 1.00 to 300.00 if Closed Loop Vector control is used.
* 2. When the control method is changed, these values are reset to factory settings for the selected control mode. (The Closed Loop Vector control factory
settings are given)
4-16
Carrier Frequency: C6

Num-
Page
Carrier fre- Selects the carrier frequency.
quency Select F to enable detailed settings
selection using parameters C6-03 to C6-05.
1: 2 kHz
C6-02 2: 5 kHz 1 to 6 3 No A A A 224H –
Carrier 3: 8 kHz
Freq Sel 4: 10 kHz
5: 12.5 kHz
6: 15 kHz
4-17
Reference Parameters: d
Preset Reference: d1

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Frequency
d1-01 reference 1 Sets the frequency reference. 0.00 Hz Yes A A A 280H 5-7
Reference 1
Frequency Sets the frequency reference
reference 2 when multi-step speed com-
d1-02 0.00 Hz Yes A A A 281H 5-7
mand 1 is ON for a multi-func-
Reference 2 tion input.
d1-03 0.00 Hz Yes A A A 282H 5-7
mand 2 is ON for a multi-func-
Reference 3 tion input.
d1-04 0.00 Hz Yes A A A 283H 5-7
mands 1 and 2 are ON for
Reference 4 multi-function inputs.
Frequency Sets the frequency when multi-
d1-05 reference 5 step speed command 3 is ON 0.00 Hz Yes A A A 284H 5-7
Reference 5 for a multi-function input.

reference 6 when multi-step speed com- 0 to
d1-06 0.00 Hz Yes A A A 285H 5-7
mands 1 and 3 are ON for 120.00
Reference 6 multi-function inputs. *1*2
d1-07 0.00 Hz Yes A A A 286H 5-7
mands 2 and 3 are ON for
d1-08 0.00 Hz Yes A A A 287H 5-7
mands 1, 2, and 3 are ON for
Vn reference Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed com- 50.00
d1-09 Yes Q Q Q 288H 5-7
Vn reference mand 4 is ON for a multi-func- Hz
tion input.
V1 reference Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed com-
d1-10 0.00 Hz Yes A A A 28BH 5-7
V1 reference mands 1 and 4 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
d1-11 0.00 Hz Yes A A A 28CH 5-7
V2 reference mands 2 and 4 are ON for a
4-18

Param-
BUS Page
Register
d1-12 0.00 Hz Yes A A A 28DH 5-7
V3 reference mands 1, 2, and 4 are ON for
Vr reference Sets the frequency reference
d1-13 0.00 Hz Yes A A A 28EH 5-7
Vr reference mands 3 and 4 are ON for
multi-function inputs. 0 to
120.00
Inspection Sets the frequency reference *1*2
reference when multi-step speed com- 25.00
d1-14 Yes Q Q Q 28FH 5-7
Inspection mands 1, 3, and 4 are ON for Hz
ref multi-function inputs.
Sets the frequency reference

when the leveling reference
d1-17 Vl reference 4.00 Hz Yes Q Q Q 292H -
selection, FJOG command, or
RJOG command is ON.
Speed Speed reference priority selec-
priority tion
selection 0: Use Multi-Speed refer
ence(D1-01-D1-08 )
d1-18 0 to 2 0 Yes A A A 292H 5-7
4
1: High Speed reference has
Priority Sel priority.
2: Leveling speed reference
has priority.
* 1. The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor, default: 0.01 Hz). If the display unit is changed, the setting range values also
change
* 2. The maximum setting value depends on the setting of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Field Weakening: d6

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Field forcing
function Enables or disables field forc-
selection ing function.
d6-03 0 or 1 0 No No A A 2A2H 5-33
0: Disabled
Field Force 1: Enabled
Sel
Field forcing Sets the upper limit for the

function excitation current applied by
Limit the field forcing function.
A setting of 100% is equal to 100 to
d6-06 400% No No A A 2A5H 5-33
the motor no-load current. 400
Field Force Field forcing is active during
Lim all types of operation except
DC Injection.
4-19
Motor Parameters: E
V/f Pattern: E1

Num-
Page
Input volt-
age setting Sets the Inverter input voltage. 155 to
200 V
E1-01 This setting is used as a reference 255 No Q Q Q 300H 5-52
Input *1
value for protection functions. *1
Voltage
Max.
output
frequency 40.0 to
E1-04 (FMAX) 120.0 60.0 Hz No Q Q Q 303H 5-52
*2
Max
Frequency
Max.
output
voltage 0.0 to 200.0
E1-05 (VMAX) 255.0 V No Q Q Q 304H 5-52
*1 *1
Max
Voltage
Base Output Voltage (V)
frequency 0.0 to
E1-06 (FA) 120.0 60.0 Hz No Q Q Q 305H 5-52
Base *2
Frequency
Mid. output
frequency
(FB) 0.0 to 3.0 Hz
E1-07 No A A No 306H 5-52
Mid 120.0 *2
Frequency (Hz)
Frequency
To set V/f characteristics in a straight
A
line, set the same values for E1-07
Mid. output and E1-09. In this case, the setting for
frequency E1-08 will be disregarded.
voltage Always ensure that the four frequen- 0.0 to
11.0 V
E1-08 (VB) cies are set in the following manner: 255 No Q Q No 307H 5-52
*1 *2
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1- *1
Mid
Voltage A 07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
Min. output
frequency
0.0 to 0.5 Hz
E1-09 (FMIN) No Q Q A 308H 5-52
120.0 *2
Min
Frequency
Min. output
frequency
voltage 0.0 to
2.0 V
E1-10 (VMIN) 255.0 No Q Q No 309H 5-52
*1 *2
*1
Min
Voltage
Base
voltage 0.0 to
Sets the output voltage of the base 0.0 V
E1-13 (VBASE) 255.0 No A No No 30CH 5-52
frequency (E1-06). *4
Base *1
Voltage
* 1. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
4-20
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (The Open Loop Vector Control factory settings are given.)
* 3. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (The Close Loop Vector Control factory settings are given.)
* 4. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
Motor Setup: E2

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Sets the motor rated current.
Motor rated
current This set value will become the
1.75 to
reference value for motor pro- 14.00 A 5-38
E2-01 35.00 No Q Q Q 30EH
Motor Rated tection and torque limits. *1
*2 5-50
FLA This parameter is an input data
for autotuning.
Sets the motor rated slip.
Motor rated
slip This set value will become the
reference value for the slip 0.00 to 2.73 Hz
E2-02 No Q Q Q 30FH 5-50
Motor Rated compensation. 20.00 *2
Slip This parameter is automati-
cally set during autotuning.
Motor no-
load current Sets the motor no-load current. 0.00 to
4.50 A
E2-03 This parameter is automati- 13.99 No Q Q Q 310H 5-50
*2
4
No-Load cally set during autotuning. *3
Current
Number of Sets the number of motor
motor poles poles.
E2-04 2 to 48 4 poles No No No Q 311H 5-50
Number of This value is an input data for
Poles autotuning.
Motor line-
to-line resis- Sets the motor phase-to-phase 0.000
resistance. 0.771 Ω
E2-05 tance to No Q Q Q 312H 5-50
This parameter is automati- *2
Term Resis- cally set during autotuning. 65.000
tance
Motor leak Sets the voltage drop due to
inductance motor leakage inductance as a
percentage of the motor rated 0.0 to 19.6%
E2-06 No No A A 313H 5-50
Leak Induc- voltage. 40.0 *2
tance This parameter is automati-
cally set during autotuning.
Motor iron Sets the motor iron saturation
saturation coefficient at 50% of magnetic
coefficient 1 flux. 0.00 to
E2-07 0.50 No No A A 314H 5-50
This parameter is automati- 0.50
Saturation cally set during rotating auto-
Comp1 tuning.
Motor iron Sets the motor iron saturation
saturation coefficient at 75% of magnetic
coefficient 2 flux. 0.00 to
E2-08 0.75 No No A A 315H 5-50
This parameter is automati- 0.75
Saturation cally set during rotating auto-
Comp2 tuning.
Motor Sets the motor mechanical
mechanical losses as a percentage of motor
losses rated output.
not necessary.
0.0 to
E2-09 Adjust the value under the fol- 0.0 % No No No A 316H 5-50
10.0
Mechnical lowing the torque loss is large
loss due e.g. to heavy friction in the
machine.
The set mechanical loss will be
compensated.
4-21
Param-
BUS Page
Register
Motor iron
loss for
torque com- 0 to 112 W
E2-10 pensation Sets motor iron losses. No A No No 317H 5-50
65535 *2
Tcomp Iron
Loss
Motor rated Sets the rated output power of
output power the motor. 0.00 to 3.70
E2-11 No Q Q Q 318H 5-50
Mtr Rated This parameter is an input data 650.00 *2
Power for autotuning.
Motor iron
saturation This parameter is automati-
1.30 to
E2-12 coefficient 3 cally set during rotating auto- 1.30 No No A A
1.60
Saturation tuning.
Comp 3
* 1. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 3.7 kW is given.
* 2. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 3.7 kW is given.
* 3. The setting range depends on the inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 3.7 kW is given.
4-22
Option Parameters: F
PG Option Setup: F1

Param-
BUS Page
Register
PG constant
Sets the number of PG pulses 0 to
F1-01 PG Pulses/ 1024 No No No Q 380H 5-63
per revolution 60000
Rev
Operation Sets the PG disconnection
selection at stopping method.
PG open cir- 0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration
cuit (PGO) to stop using the
deceleration time 1, C1-
02.)
1: Coast to stop
F1-02 0 to 3 1 No No No A 381H 5-63
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
PG Fdbk using the deceleration time
Loss Sel in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To
protect the motor or
machinery, avoid to use 4
this setting.)
Operation Sets the stopping method when
selection at an overspeed (OS) fault
overspeed occurs.
(OS) 0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration
to stop using the
02.)
F1-03 1: Coast to stop 0 to 3 1 No No No A 382H 5-63
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
PG Over- using the deceleration time
speed Sel in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To
protect the motor or
machinery, avoid to use
this setting.)
Operation Sets the stopping method when
selection ata speed deviation (DEV) fault
deviation occurs.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration
to stop using the
02.)
F1-04 0 to 3 3 No No No A 383H 5-63
1: Coast to stop
PG 2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
Deviation Sel using the deceleration time
in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV
is displayed and operation
continued.)
PG rotation 0: Phase A leads with forward
run command. (Phase B
leads with reverse run
command.)
F1-05 PG Rotation 0 or 1 0 No No No Q 384H 5-63
1: Phase B leads with forward
Sel run command. (Phase A
leads with reverse run
command.)
4-23
Param-
BUS Page
Register
PG division Sets the division ratio for the
rate (PG PG speed control card pulse
pulse moni- output.
tor) Division ratio = (1+ n) /m
(n=0 or 1 m=1 to 32)
The first digit of the value of
F1-06 F1-06 stands for n, the second 1 to 132 1 No No No A 385H 5-63
and the third stands for m.
PG Output This parameter is effective
Ratio only when a PG-B2 is used.
The possible division ratio set-
tings are: 1/32 ≤ F1-06
≤ 1.
Overspeed
detection Sets the overspeed detection
F1-08 level method. 0 to 120 115% No No No A 387H 5-63
PG Overspd Motor speeds that continue to
Level exceed the value set in F1-08
(set as a percentage of the
Overspeed maximum output frequency)
detection for the time set in F1-09 are 0.0 to
F1-09 delay time 0.0 s No No No A 388H 5-63
detected as overspeed faults. 2.0
PG Overspd
Excessive
speed devia- Sets the speed deviation detec-
tion detection method.
F1-10 tion level 0 to 50 10% No No No A 389H 5-63
Any speed deviation above the
PG Deviate F1-10 set level (set as a per-
Level centage of the maximum out-
put frequency) that continues
Excessive for the time set in F1-11 is
speed devia- detected as a speed deviation.
tion detec- The speed deviation is the dif-
0.0 to
F1-11 tion delay ference between actual motor 0.5 s No No No A 38AH 5-63
time 10.0
speed and the speed reference
PG Deviate command.
Time
PG open-cir-
cuit detec- Used to set the PG disconnec-
tion delay tion detection time. PGO will 0.0 to
F1-14 time 1.0 s No No No A 38DH 5-63
be detected if the detection 10.0
PGO Detect time exceeds the set time.
Time
4-24
Analog Monitor Cards: F4

User constants for the Analog Monitor Card are shown in the following table.
Name Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Setting Factory during Closed BUS
stant Description Range Setting Opera- Loop Regis-
Page
Number Display V/f
Vec-
Loop
tion Vector ter
tor
Channel 1 Effective when the Analog
monitor Monitor Card is used.
F4-01 selection Monitor selection: 1 to 99 2 No A A A 391H -
Set the number of the monitor
AO Ch1
item to be output. (U1-)
Select
Gain:
Channel 1 Set the multiple of 10 V for
gain outputting monitor items. 0.0 to
F4-02 100.0% Yes A A A 392H -
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40 1000.0
AO Ch1 Gain cannot be set. 29 to 31 and 41
Channel 2 are not used. When the AO-

monitor 12 Analog Monitor Card is
selection used, outputs of ± 10 V are
F4-03 1 to 99 3 No A A A 393H -
possible. To output ± 10 V, set
AO Ch2 F4-07 or F4-08 to 1. When
Select the AO-08 Analog Monitor
Card is used, only outputs of
Channel 2
0 to +10 V are possible. 0.0 to
4
F4-04 gain 50.0% Yes A A A 394H
A meter calibration function 1000.0 -
AO Ch2 Gain is available.
Channel 1
output moni- Sets the channel 1 item bias -110.0
F4-05 tor bias to 100%/10 V when the ana- to 0.0% Yes A A A 395H -
log monitor card is used. 110.0
AO Ch1 Bias
Channel 2
output moni- Sets the channel 2 item bias -110.0
F4-06 tor bias to 100%/10 V when the ana- to 0.0% Yes A A A 396H -
log monitor card is used. 110.0
AO Ch2 Bias
Analog out-
put signal
level for 0: 0 to 10 V
F4-07 channel 1 0 or 1 0 No A A A 397H -
1: -10 to +10 V
AO Opt
Level Sel
Analog out-
put signal
level for 0: 0 to 10 V
F4-08 channel 2 0 or 1 0 No A A A 398H -
1: -10 to +10 V
AO Opt
Level Sel
4-25
Digital Output Card (DO-02 and DO-08): F5
User constants for the Digital Output Card are shown in the following table.
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
Number Display V/f
Vec-
Loop
tion Vector ter
tor
Channel 1 Effective when a Digital Out-
output selec- put Card (DO-02 or DO-08)
F5-01 tion is used. 0 to 43 0 No A A A 399H -
DO Ch1 Set the number of the multi-
Select function output to be output.
Channel 2 Effective when a Digital Out-

output selec- put Card (DO-02 or DO-08)
F5-02 tion is used. 0 to 43 1 No A A A 39AH -
DO Ch2 Set the number of the multi-
Select function output to be output.
Channel 3
output selec- Effective when a DO-08 Dig-
tion ital Output Card is used.
F5-03 0 to 43 2 No A A A 39BH -
Set the number of the multi-
DO Ch3 function output to be output.
Select
Channel 4
F5-04 0 to 43 4 No A A A 39CH -
Select
Channel 5
F5-05 0 to 43 6 No A A A 39DH -
Select
Channel 6
F5-06 0 to 43 37 No A A A 39EH -
Select
Channel 7 Effective when a DO-08 Dig-

output selec- ital Output Card is used.
F5-07 tion Set the number of the multi- 0 to 43 0F No A A A 39FH -
Select
Channel 8
F5-08 0 to 43 0F No A A A 3A0H -
Select
DO-08 out- Effective when a DO-08 Dig-

put mode ital Output Card is used.
selection Set the output mode.
0: 8-channel individual out-
F5-09 0 to 2 0 No A A A 3A1H -
puts
DO-08 Selec- 1: Binary code output
tion 2: Output according to
F5-01 to F5-08 settings.
4-26
Serial Communications Option card: F6

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Operation Sets the stopping method for
selection communications errors.
after commu- 0: Deceleration to stop using
nications the deceleration time in C1-
F6-01 error 02 0 to 3 1 No A A A 3A2H -
1: Coast to stop
BUS Fault 2: Emergency stop using the
Sel deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
Input level of
external error
from Com-
0: Always detect
F6-02 munications 0 or 1 0 No A A A 3A3H -
Option Card 1: Detect during operation
EF0 Fault
Detection
Stopping
method for 0: Deceleration to stop using
external error the deceleration time in C1-
02
4
from Com-
F6-03 munications 1: Coast to stop 0 to 3 1 No A A A 3A4H -
Option Card 2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09
EF0 Fault 3: Continue operation
Action
Trace sam-
pling from
Communica-
0 to
F6-04 tions Option - 0 No A A A 3A5H -
Card 60000
Trace Sam-
pling Time
Current mon-
itor unit Sets the unit of current monitor
F6-05 selection 0: Ampere 0 or 1 0 No A A A 3A6H -
Current Unit 1: 100%/8192
Sel
Torque refer-
ence/torque
limit selec- 0: Torque reference/torque
tion from limit by communications
option disabled.
F6-06 communica- 0 or 1 0 No No No A 3A7H -
tions option 1: Torque reference/torque
card limit by communications
option enabled.
Torque Ref/
Lmt Sel
4-27
Terminal Function Parameters: H
Multi-function Digital Inputs: H1

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Terminal S3
function
H1-01 selection Multi-function input 1 0 to 88 24 No A A A 400H -
Terminal S3
Sel
Terminal S4
function
Terminal S4
Sel
Terminal S5
function
Terminal S5
Sel
Terminal S6
function
Terminal S6
Sel
Terminal S7
function
Terminal S7
Sel
Multi-function Digital Input Functions

Control Methods
Setting Open Closed Page
Value
Function
V/f Loop Loop
Vector Vector
Multi-step speed reference 1
3 Yes Yes Yes -
If H3-09 is set to 2, this function is combined with the master/auxiliary speed switch.
4 Multi-step speed reference 2 Yes Yes Yes -
5 Multi-step speed reference 3 Yes Yes Yes -
6 Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference) Yes Yes Yes -
7 Accel/decel time 1 Yes Yes Yes 5-18
8 External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON) Yes Yes Yes 5-42
9 External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF) Yes Yes Yes 5-42
F Not used (Set when a terminal is not used) - - -
14 Fault reset (Reset when turned ON) Yes Yes Yes 6-2
Emergency stop. (NO: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when
15 Yes Yes Yes 5-10
ON.)
Emergency stop (NC: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when
17 Yes Yes Yes 5-10
OFF)
Timer function input (Functions are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer function
18 Yes Yes Yes -
outputs are set in H1- and H2-.)
4-28
Control Methods
Setting Open Closed Page
Value
Function
V/f Loop Loop
Vector Vector
External fault
20 to 2F Yes Yes Yes -
Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation
80 Nominal Speed Reference Yes Yes Yes -
81 Intermediate Speed Reference Yes No No -
82 Releveling Speed Reference Yes Yes Yes -
83 Leveling Speed Reference Yes Yes Yes -
84 Inspection Run Command Yes Yes Yes -
85 Battery Operation Command Yes Yes Yes -
86 Output Contactor Answer Back Signal Yes Yes Yes -
87 High Speed Limit Switch (UP) Yes Yes Yes -
88 High Speed Limit Switch (Down) Yes Yes Yes -
Multi-function Contact Outputs: H2

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Terminal
M1-M2 func-
4
H2-01 tion selection 0 to 43 40 No A A A 40BH -
output 1
Term
M1-M2 Sel
Terminal
M3-M4 func-
H2-02 tion selection 0 to 43 41 No A A A 40CH -
output 2
Term
M3-M4 Sel
Terminal
M5-M6 func-
H2-03 tion selection 0 to 43 6 No A A A 40DH -
output 3
Term
M5-M6 Sel
Multi-function Contact Output Functions
Set- Control Methods

ting Function Open Closed Page
V/f loop Loop
Value Vector Vector
0 During run (ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output) Yes Yes Yes 5-47
1 Zero-speed Yes Yes Yes 5-47
2 fref/fout agree 1 (detection width L4-02 is used.) Yes Yes Yes 5-24
fref/fset agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = ±L4-01, with detection width L4-02 used
3 Yes Yes Yes 5-24
and during frequency agree)
Frequency detection 1 (ON: +L4-01 ≥ output frequency ≥ -L4-01, with detection
4 Yes Yes Yes 5-24
width L4-02 used)
Frequency detection 2 (ON: Output frequency ≥ +L4-01 or output frequency ≤ -L4-
5 Yes Yes Yes 5-24
01, with detection width L4-02 used)
Inverter operation ready
6 Yes Yes Yes 5-47
READY: After initialization or no faults
7 During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection Yes Yes Yes 5-47
8 During baseblock (NO contact, ON: during baseblock) Yes Yes Yes 5-47
9 Frequency reference source selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator) Yes Yes Yes 5-47
4-29
Set- Control Methods
ting Function Open Closed Page
V/f loop Loop
Value Vector Vector
A Run command source selection status (ON: Run command from Operator) Yes Yes Yes 5-47
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact, ON: Overtorque/undertorque
B Yes Yes Yes 5-47
detection)
C Loss of frequency reference (Effective when 1 is set for L4-05) Yes Yes Yes 5-36
D Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault) Yes Yes Yes 5-37
Fault (ON: Digital Operator/Monitor communications error or fault other than
E Yes Yes Yes 5-47
CPF00 and CPF01 has occurred.)
F Not used. (Set when the terminal is not used.) Yes Yes Yes -
10 Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed) Yes Yes Yes 5-47
11 Fault reset command active Yes Yes Yes 5-48
12 Timer function output Yes Yes Yes -
13 fref/fset agree 2 (detection width L4-04 is used) Yes Yes Yes 5-24
fref/fset agree 2 (ON: Output frequency = L4-03, with detection width L4-04 is used,
14 Yes Yes Yes 5-24
and during frequency agree)
Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency ≤ -L4-03, detection width L4-04 is
15 Yes Yes Yes 5-24
used)
Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency ≥ -L4-03, detection width L4-04 is
16 Yes Yes Yes 5-24
used)
17 Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact, OFF: Torque detection) Yes Yes Yes 5-47
18 Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact, ON: Torque detection) Yes Yes Yes 5-47
19 Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact, OFF: Torque detection) Yes Yes Yes 5-47
1A During reverse run (ON: During reverse run) Yes Yes Yes 5-48
1B During baseblock 2 (OFF: During baseblock) Yes Yes Yes 5-48
1D During regenerative operation No No Yes 5-48
1E Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled) Yes Yes Yes -
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection
1F Yes Yes Yes 5-39
level)
20 Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting) Yes Yes Yes 5-40
30 During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit) No Yes Yes 5-30
31 During speed limit No No Yes -
33 Zero-servo end (ON: Zero-Servo completed) No No Yes -
During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, initial
37 Yes Yes Yes 5-47
excitation, operation stop)
38 During cooling fan operation Yes Yes Yes 5-48
40 Brake Release Command Yes Yes Yes -
41 Output Contactor Close Command Yes Yes Yes -
42 Speed detection at deceleration Yes Yes Yes -
43 Not Zero Speed Yes Yes Yes -
4-30
Analog Inputs: H3
User constants for analog inputs are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods MEMO
Con-
Setting Factory during Open Close BUS
stant Description Range Setting Opera- Regis-
Page
Signal level
selection (AI- 0: 0 to ±10V
14B CH1) [11-bit + polarity (posi-
H3-01 0 or 1 0 No A A A 410H 5-22
tive/negative) input]
AI-14 CH1 1: 0 to ±10V
Signal
Gain (AI-14B
CH1) Sets the frequency when 10 V
0.0 to
H3-02 is input, as a percentage of the 100.0% Yes A A A 411H 5-48
AI-14 CH1 1000.0
maximum output frequency.
Gain
Bias (AI-14B
CH1) Sets the frequency when 0 V -100.0
H3-03 is input, as a percentage of the to 0.0% Yes A A A 412H 5-48
AI-14 CH1 maximum frequency. +100.0
Bias
Signal level
selection (AI- 0: 0 to ±10V
4
14B CH3) [11-bit + polarity (posi-
H3-04 0 or 1 0 No A A A 413H -
tive/negative) input]
AI-13 CH3 1: 0 to ±10V
Signal
Multi-func-
tion analog
input (AI- Select from the functions
H3-05 14B CH3) listed in the following table. 2,3,14 2 No A A A 414H -
Refer to the next page.
AI-14 CH3
Sel
Gain (AI-14B Sets the input gain (level)

CH3) when terminal 16 is 10V. 0.0 to
H3-06 100.0% Yes A A A 415H -
AI-14 CH3 Set according to the 100% 1000.0
Gain value selected from H3-05.
Bias (AI-14B Sets the input gain (level)

CH3) -100.0
when terminal 16 is 10V.
H3-07 to 0.0% Yes A A A 416H -
AI-14 CH3 Set according to the 100%
+100.0
Bias value selected from H3-05.
Multi-func- 0: Limit negative frequency

tion analog settings for gain and bias
input AI-14B settings to 0.
CH2 signal 1: Do not limit negative
level selec- frequency settings for
tion gain and bias settings to 0
H3-08 0 to 2 2 No A A A 417H 5-48
(i.e., allow reverse
operation).
AI-14B CH2 2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
Signal Switch current and voltage
input using the switch on the
control panel.
Multi-func-
tion analog
input AI-14B Select multi-function analog
H3-09 CH2 func- input function for AI-14B 0 to 1F 3 No A A A 418H 5-48
tion selection CH2. Refer to the next table.
AI-14 CH2
Sel
4-31
Con-
Setting Factory during Open Close BUS
Page
Gain (AI-14 Sets the input gain (level)

CH2) when terminal 14 is 10 V (20
mA). 0.0 to
H3-10 100.0% Yes A A A 419H 5-48
AI-14 CH2 Set according to the 100% 1000.0
Gain value for the function set for
H3-09.
Bias (AI-14B Sets the input gain (level)

CH2) when terminal 14 is 0 V (4
-100.0
mA).
H3-11 to 0.0% Yes A A A 41AH 5-48
AI-14B CH2 Set according to the 100% +100.0
Bias value for the function set for
H3-09.
Analog input Sets primary delay filter time

filter time constant in seconds for the
constant two analog input (A1 and AI- 0.00 to 0.03
H3-12 No A A A 41BH 5-48
14B CH1,2,3). 2.00 s
Filter Avg Effective for noise control
Time etc.
Terminal A1 Sets the multi-function analog

function input function for terimnal
H3-15 selection A1. 0 or 1 0 No A A A 434H -
Terminal A1 0: Frequency Referemce
Sel 1: Torque compensation
Gain (Termi-
nal A1) Sets the frequency when 10 V
0.0 to
H3-16 is input, as a percentage of the 100.0% Yes A A A 435H -
Terminal A1 1000.0
maximum output frequency.
Gain
Bias (Termi-
nal A1) Sets the frequency when 0 V -100.0
H3-17 is input, as a percentage of the to 0.0% Yes A A A 436H -
Terminal A1 maximum frequency. +100.0
Bias
These parameters display when AI-14B is installed.
H3-05,H3-09 Settings
Control Methods
Setting Open
Function Contents (100%) Closed Page
Value Loop
V/f Loop
Vec-
Vector
torop
Auxiliary frequency reference (is used
2 Maximum output frequency (AI-14B use only) Yes Yes Yes 5-6
as frequency reference 2)
Auxiliary frequency reference (is used
3 Maximum output frequency (AI-14B use only) Yes Yes Yes 5-6
as frequency reference 3)
14 Torque compensation Motor’s rated torque (AI-14B use only) No No Yes -
4-32
MEMOBUS Communications: H5
User constants for MEMOBUS communications are shown in the following table.
Change MEMO-
Con- Open
Page
Number Display V/f
Vec-
Loop
tion Vector ter
tor
Station
address 0 to 20
H5-01 Set the Inverter's node address. 1F No A A A 425H 5-61
*
Serial
Comm Adr
Communi- Set the baud rate for 6CN

cation MEMOBUS communications.
speed selec- 0: 1200 bps
H5-02 tion 1: 2400 bps 0 to 4 3 No A A A 426H 5-61
2: 4800 bps
Serial Baud 3: 9600 bps
Rate 4: 19200 bps
Communi- Set the parity for 6CN MEMO-

cation par- BUS communications.
H5-03 ity selection 0: No parity 0 to 2 0 No A A A 427H 5-61
Serial Com 1: Even parity
Sel 2: Odd parity
Stopping
method
Set the stopping method for
communications errors.
4
after com- 0: Deceleration to stop using
munication deceleration time in C1-02
H5-04 0 to 3 3 No A A A 428H 5-61
error 1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using
Serial Fault deceleration time in C1-09
Sel 3: Continue operation
Communi- Set whether or not a communi-
cation error cations timeout is to be
detection detected as a communications
H5-05 selection 0 or 1 1 No A A A 429H 5-61
error.
Serial Flt 0: Do not detect.
Dtct 1: Detect
Send wait
time Set the time from the Inverter
H5-06 receiving data to when the 5 to 65 5 ms No A A A 42AH 5-61
Transmit Inverter starts to send.
WaitTIM
RTS con- Select to enable or disable

trol ON/ RTS control.
OFF 0: Disabled (RTS is always
H5-07 0 or 1 1 No A A A 42BH 5-61
ON)
RTS Con- 1: Enabled (RTS turns ON
trol Sel only when sending)
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
4-33
Protection Function Parameters: L
Motor Overload: L1

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Sets whether the motor thermal
overload protection function is
Motor pro-
tection selec- enabled or disabled.
0: Disabled
tion
1: General-purpose motor
protection (fan cooled
motor)
2: Inverter motor protection
(externally cooled motor)
3: Vector motor protection
L1-01 When the Inverter power 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q 480H 5-38
supply is turned off, the
thermal value is reset, so
MOL Fault
even if this parameter is set
Select
to 1, protection may not be
effective.
When several motors are con-
nected to one Inverter, set to
L1-01 to 0 and ensure that each
motor is installed with a pro-
tection device.
Motor pro- Sets the electric thermal detec-
tection time tion time in seconds units.
constant Usually changing this setting is
not necessary.
The factory setting is 150%
0.1 to
L1-02 overload for one minute. 1.0 min No A A A 481H 5-38
5.0
MOL Time When the motor's overload
Const capability is known, also set
the overload resistance protec-
tion time for when the motor is
hot started.
Power Loss Ridethrough: L2
Name
Chang Control Methods MEMO-
Param- e dur-
Setting Factory Open Closed BUS
eter Description ing Page
Number
Range Setting V/f Loop Loop Regis-
Display Opera- Vector Vector
tion ter
Undervolt-
Sets the DC bus undervoltage
age detec-
(UV) detection level (DC bus 150 to
tion level 190 V
L2-05 voltage). 210 No A A A 489H -
*1
PUV Det Usually changing this setting is *1
Level not necessary.
Battery Volt-
age 0 to 400 0V
L2-11 Sets the battery voltage. No A A A 4CBH -
Battery Volt- *1 *1
age
* 1. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. The value for a 400 V class Inverter is the double.
4-34
Stall Prevention: L3

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Stall preven- 0: Disabled (Acceleration as
tion selec- set. With a heavy load, the
tion during motor may stall.)
accel 1: Enabled (Acceleration
stopped when L3-02 level
is exceeded. Acceleration
starts again when the
current has fallen below the
L3-01 0 to 2 1 No A A No 48FH 5-21
stall prevention level).
StallP Accel 2: Intelligent acceleration
Sel mode (Using the L3-02
level as a basis,
acceleration is
automatically adjusted. The
set acceleration time is
disregarded.)
Stall preven- Sets the stall prevention during
tion level acceleration operation current
during accel level as a percentage of
Inverter rated current.
150%
L3-02 Effective when L3-01 is set to 0 to 200
StallP Accel 1 or 2.
Lvl Usually changing this setting is
*
No A A No 490H 5-21
4
not necessary. Reduce the set-
ting when the motor stalls.
Stall preven- Selects the stall prevention
tion selec- during running.
tion during 0: Disabled (Runs as set. With
running a heavy load, the motor
may stall.)
L3-05 0 to 2 1 No A No No 493H 5-34
1: Deceleration using
StallP Run deceleration time 1
Sel (C1-02.)
2: Deceleration using
decelerationtime 2 (C1-04.)
Stall preven- Set the stall prevention during
tion level running operation current level
during run- as a percentage of the Inverter
ning rated current.
30 to
L3-06 Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2. 150% No A No No 494H 5-34
200
StallP Run not necessary.
Level Reduce the setting when the
motor stalls.
4-35
Reference Detection: L4

Num-
Page
Speed agree-
ment detection Effective when "fout/fset agree 0.0 to
1", "Frequency detection 1" or
L4-01 level 120.0 0.0 Hz No A A A 499H 5-23
"Frequency detection 2" is set
Spd Agree *
for a multi-function output.
Level
Speed agree- Effective when "fref/fout agree
ment detection 1", "fout/fset agree 1" or "Fre-
0.0 to
L4-02 width quency detection 1" or "Fre- 2.0 Hz No A A A 49AH 5-23
20.0
Spd Agree quency detection 2" is set for a
Width multi-function output.
Speed agree-
ment detection Effective when "fout/fset agree -120.0
2", "Frequency detection 3" or to
L4-03 level (+/-) 0.0 Hz No A A A 49BH 5-23
"Frequency detection 4" is set +120.0
Spd Agree for a multi-function output. *
Lvl+-
Speed agree- Effective when "fref/fout agree
ment detection 2" "fout/fset agree 2", "Fre-
0.0 to
L4-04 width (+/-) quency detection 3" or "Fre- 2.0 Hz No A A A 49CH 5-23
20.0
Spd Agree quency detection 4" is set for a
Wdth+- multi-function output.
Operation 0: Stop (Operation follows the
when fre- frequency reference.)
quency refer- 1: Operation continues at the
ence is missing frequency, set in parameter
L4-05 L4-06. 0 or 1 0 No A A A 49DH 5-36
Frequency reference loss
Ref Loss Sel means that the frequency
reference value drops over
90% in 400 ms.
Frequency ref-
erence value at
frequency ref- Sets the frequency reference 0.0 to
L4-06 erence loss value when the frequency ref- 80.0% No A A A 4C2H 5-36
100.0%
erence is missing
Fret at Floss
Fault Restart: L5

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Number of Sets the number of auto restart
auto restart attempts.
attempts Automatically restarts after a
fault The retry fault code are
L5-01 0 to 10 2 No A A A 49EH -
the followings
Num of OV
Restarts UV1,GF,OC,OL2,OL3,OL4,
UL3,UL4,PF,LF,SE1,SE2,SE3
Auto restart Sets whether a fault contact
operation output is activated during fault
selection restart.
L5-02 0: No output (Fault contact is 0 or 1 1 No A A A 49FH -
not activated.)
Restart Sel 1: Output (Fault contact is
activated.)
4-36
Torque Detection: L6

Param-
BUS Page
Register
0: Overtorque/undertorque
Torque detection disabled.
detection
1: Overtorque detection only
selection 1
with speed agreement;
operation continues
(warning is output).
2: Overtorque detected
continuously during
operation; operation
continues
3: Overtorque detection only
output stopped upon
detection.
4: Overtorque detected
continuously during
operation; output stopped
L6-01 0 to 8 0 No A A A 4A1H 5-34
upon detection.
5: Undertorque detection only
Torq Det 1 Sel
4
operation continues
6: Undertorque detected
continuously during
operation; operation
continues
7: Undertorque detection only
output stopped upon
detection.
8: Undertorque detected
continuously during
operation; output stopped
upon detection.
Torque detec- Open loop vector control:
tion level 1 Motor rated torque is set as
L6-02 100%. 0 to 300 150% No A A A 4A2H 5-34
Torq Det 1 V/f control: Inverter rated cur-
Lvl rent is set as 100%.
Torque detec-
tion time 1 Sets the overtorque/under- 0.0 to
L6-03 0.1 s No A A A 4A3H 5-34
Torq Det 1 torque detection time. 10.0
Time
Torque detec-
tion selection
L6-04 2 0 to 8 0 No A A A 4A4H 5-34
Torq Det 2 Sel
Torque detec-
tion level 2 See L6-01 to L6-03 for a 0 to
L6-05 description. 150% No A A A 4A5H 5-34
Torq Det 2 300
Lvl
Torque detec-
tion time 2 0.0 to
L6-06 0.1 s No A A A 4A6H 5-34
Torq Det 2 10.0
Time
4-37
Torque Limits: L7

Num-
Page
Forward
drive
torque limit
0 to
L7-01 200%* No No A A 4A7H 5-37
300
Torq Limit
Fwd
Reverse
drive
torque limit Sets the torque limit value as a per-
centage of the motor rated torque. 0 to
L7-02 200%* No No A A 4A8H 5-37
Four individual regions can be set. 300
Torq Limit
Rev
Output torque
Positive torque
Forward
No. of
regenera- Regenera- motor
Revers rotations
tive torque e
tive state
For-
limit Regenera- 0 to
L7-03 tive state ward 200%* No No A A 4A9H 5-37
300
Torq Lmt Negative
Fwd Rgn
Reverse
regenera-
tive torque
limit 0 to
L7-04 200%* No No A A 4AAH 5-37
300
Torq Lmt
Rev Rgn
Torque
limit time
Sets the torque limit integration time 5 to
L7-06 constant 200 ms No No A No 4ACH -
constant 10000
Torque
Limit Time
Torque Sets the torque limit operation during
Limit Oper- acceleration and deceleration.
ation dur- 0: P-control (I control is added at
ing accel/ constant speed operation)
decel 1: I-control
Normally changing this setting is not
L7-07 necessary. 0 or 1 0 No No A No 4C9H -
If the torque limitation accuracy dur-
Torque ing accel/decel. has preference, I con-
Limit Sel trol should be selected. This may
result in an increased accel./decel.
time and speed deviations from the
reference value.
* A setting value of 100% is equal to the motor rated torque.
4-38
Hardware Protection: L8

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Overheat pre- Sets the detection temperature
alarm level for the Inverter overheat detec-
tion pre-alarm in °C. 50 to
L8-02 75 °C* No A A A 4AEH 5-40
OH Pre- The pre-alarm detects when 130
Alarm Lvl the cooling fin temperature
reaches the set value.
Operation Sets the operation for when the
selection after Inverter overheat pre-alarm
overheat pre- occurs.
alarm 0: Decelerate to stop using the
deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
L8-03 2: Fast stop in fast-stop time 0 to 3 3 No A A A 4AFH 5-40
C1-09.
OH Pre- 3: Continue operation
Alarm Sel (Monitor display only.)
A fault will be given in setting
0 to 2 and a minor fault will be
given in setting 3.
Input open- 0: Disabled
L8-05
phase protec-1: Enabled (Detects power
tion selection supply open-phase, power
0 or 1 0 No A A A 4B1H 5-40
4
supply voltage imbalance
Ph Loss In Sel or DC bus electrostatic
capacitor deterioration.)
Output open- 0: Disabled
phase protec- 1: Enabled, 1 Phase
tion selection Observatioin
2: Enabled, 2 and Phase
Observatioin
An output open-phase is
L8-07 detected at less than 5% of 0 to 2 2 No A A A 4B3H 5-41
Ph Loss Out Inverter rated current.
Sel When the applied motor capac-
ity is small compared to the
Inverter capacity, the detection
may not work properly and
should be disabled.
Ground pro- 0:Disabled
tection selec- 1:Enabled
L8-09 tion It is not recommended to use 0 or 1 1 No A A A 4B5H 5-41
Ground Fault another setting than factory
Sel setting.
Cooling fan Set the ON/OFF control for the

control selec- cooling fan.
L8-10 tion 0: ON when Inverter is 0 or 1 0 No A A A 4B6H 5-42
Fan On/Off running only
Sel 1: ON whenever power is ON
Cooling fan
control delay Set the time in seconds to
delay turning OFF the cooling
L8-11 time 0 to 300 60 s No A A A 4B7H 5-42
fan after the inverter STOP
Fan Delay command is given.
Time
Ambient tem-
perature
L8-12 Sets the ambient temperature. 45 to 60 45 °C No A A A 4B8H 5-42
Ambient
Temp
4-39
Param-
BUS Page
Register
OL2 charac- 0: OL2 characteristics at low
teristics selec- speeds disabled.
tion at low 1: OL2 characteristics at low
L8-15 speeds speeds enabled. 0 or 1 1 No A A A 4BBH 5-41
It is not recomended to use
OL2 Sel @ another setting than the factory
L-Spd setting.
Soft CLA
selection 0: Disable
L8-18 0 or 1 1 No A A A 4BFH -
1: Enable
Soft CLA Sel
LF detection
time 0.0 to
L8-20 Sets the detection time of LF. 0.2sec No A A A 4C0H -
2.0
LF det time
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 3.7 kW is given.
N: Special Adjustments
Automatic Frequency Regulator: N2

Change Control Methods MEMO-
Param-
eter Name Description Range Setting Opera-
BUS Page
tion Vector Vector
Register
Speed feed- Sets the internal speed feed-

back detec- back detection control gain.
tion control Normally, there is no need to
(AFR) gain change this setting.
If necessary, adjust this param-
eter as follows:
0.00 to
N2-01 • If hunting occurs, increase 1.00 No No A No 584H 5-31
10.00
the set value.
AFR Gain • If response is low, decrease
the set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a
time, while checking the
response.
Speed feed-
back detec- Set the time constant 1 to
tion control decide the rate of change in the 0 to
N2-02 (AFR) time 50 ms No No A No 585H 5-31
speed feedback detection con- 2000
constant trol.
AFR Time
Speed feed-
back detec-
tion control Set the time constant 2 to
0 to
N2-03 (AFR) time decide the rate of change in the 750 ms No No A No 586H 5-31
2000
constant 2 speed.
AFR Time 2
4-40
Feed Forward: N5
User constants for the feed forward control are shown in the following table.
Con-
Setting Factory during Open Closed BUS
Page
Feed forward
control selec- Select the feed forward con-
tion trol.
N5-01
0: Disabled
0 or 1 1*1 No No No A 5B0H 5-31
Feedfoward 1: Enabled
Sel
Motor accel- Set the time required to

eration time accelerate the motor at the
rated torque (T100) to the
rated speed (Nr).
J: GO2/4, P: Motor rated out- 0.001
put 0.178 s
N5-02 to No No No A 5B1H 5-31
*2
Motor Accel 2π · J [kgm2] · Nr [r/min] 10.000
ta = [s]
Time 60 · T100 [N · m]
However,
60 P [kW]
T100 = · × 103 [N · m]
2π Nr [n/min]
Feed forward
proportional
Set the proportional gain for
feed forward control.
0.00 to
4
N5-03 gain Speed reference response will 1.00 No No No A 5B2H 5-31
100.00
Feedfoward increase as the setting of N5-
Gain 03 is increased.
* 1. The factory setting depends on the inverter capacity.

* 2. The value for a 200V class inverter of 3.7 kW is given.
Digital Operator/Monitor Parameters: o
Monitor Selections: o1

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Monitor Set the number of the 4rd.
selection monitor item to be displayed in
o1-01 4 to 99 6 Yes A A A 500H 5-54
User Moni- the Drive Mode. (U1-)
tor Sel (On LED operator only.)
Monitor Sets the monitor item to be dis-
selection played when the power is
after power turned on.
up 1: Frequency reference
o1-02 1 to 4 1 Yes A A A 501H 5-54
2: Output frequency
Power-On 3: Output current
Monitor 4: The monitor item set for
o1-01
4-41
Param-
BUS Page
Register
Frequency Sets the units that will be set
units of refer- and displayed for the fre-
ence setting quency reference and fre-
and monitor quency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units
(Maximum output
frequency is 100%)
2 to 39: rpm units (Set the
motor poles.)
40 to 39999: User
desired display Set
the desired values for 0 to
o1-03 0 No A A A 502H 5-54
setting and display for 39999
Display the max. output
Scaling frequency.
Sets the value that is

to be displayed at
100% excluding the
decimal point.
Sets the number of

decimal places.
Example: When the max. out-

put frequency value is 200.0,
set 12000
Setting unit
for fre-
quency Set the setting unit for fre-
parameters quency reference-related
o1-04 related to V/f parameters. 0 or 1 0 No No No A 503H 5-55
characteris- 0: Hz
tics 1: min−1
V/f Display
Unit
LCD Dis- Sets the contrast on the
play contrast optional LCD operator
adjustment (JVOP-160).
1: light
o1-05 0 to 5 3 Yes A A A 504H 5-55
2:
LCD Con-
3: normal
trast 4:
5: dark
Digital Operator/Monitor Functions: o2

Param-
BUS Page
Register
LOCAL/ Enables/Disables the Digital
REMOTE Operator/Monitor Local/
Remote key
key enable/
disable 0: Disabled
o2-01 0 or 1 0 No A A A 505H 5-56
1: Enabled (Switches between
Local/ the Digital Operator/Moni-
Remote Key tor and the parameter
settings b1-01, b1-02.)
4-42

Param-
BUS Page
Register
STOP key Enables/Disables the Stop key
during con- in the run mode.
trol circuit 0: Disabled (When the run
terminal command is issued from an
o2-02 0 or 1 0 No A A A 506H 5-55
operation external terminal, the Stop
key is disabled.)
Oper Stop 1: Enabled (Effective even
Key during run.)
Clears or stores user initial val-
User parame- ues.
ter initial 0: Stores/not set
value 1: Begins storing (Records the
set parameters as user
o2-03 initial values.) 0 to 2 0 No A A A 507H 5-55
2: All clear (Clears all
User recorded user initial values)
Defaults When the set parameters are
recorded as user initial values,
1110 will be set in A1-03.
kVA selec- Do not set unless after replac-
tion ing the control board. (Refer to
o2-04 0 to FF 0 No A A A 508H 5-55
4
Inverter page 5-60 for the setting val-
Model# ues).
Frequency When the frequency reference

reference set- is set on the Digital Operator/
ting method Monitor frequency reference
selection monitor, sets whether the Enter
key is necessary or not.
o2-05 0: Enter key needed 0 or 1 0 No A A A 509H 5-55
1: Enter key not needed
Operator When set to 1, the Inverter
M.O.P. accepts the frequency refer-
ence without Enter key opera-
tion.
Operation Sets the operation when the
selection Digital Operator/Monitor is
when digital disconnected.
operator is 0: Operation continues even if
disconnected the Digital Operator/Moni-
tor is disconnected.
o2-06 0 or 1 0 No A A A 50AH 5-27
1: OPR is detected at Digital
Operator/Monitor
Oper disconnection. Inverter
Detection output is switched off, and
the fault contact is
operated.
Cumulative
operation
Sets the cumulative operation 0 to
o2-07 time setting 0 hr No A A A 50BH 5-55
time in hour units. 65535
Elapsed Time
Set
Cumulative
operation 0: Accumulated inverter
time selec- power on time.
o2-08 tion 0 or 1 0 No A A A 50CH 5-55
1: Accumulated inverter run
Elapsed Time time.
Run
Initialize
0: Asia
Mode
o2-09 1: America 0 to 2 0 No A A A 50DH -
InitModeSet 2: Europe
4-43
Param-
BUS Page
Register
Fan opera- Sets the initial value of the fan
tion time set- operation time.
0 to
o2-10 ting The operation time is accumu- 0 hr No A A A 50EH 5-56
65535
Fan ON Time lated starting from this set
Set value.
Fault trace 0: No initialisation

initialize 1: Initialize (= zero clear) after
o2-12 0 or 1 0 No A A A 510H 5-56
Fault Trace setting ”1“ o2-12 will be
Init returned to ”0“
Operation Operation counter initilaliza-

counter ini- tion
tialize 0:
o2-15 0 or 1 0 No A A A 513H -
1: operation counter monitor
Operation clear
CNT Ini
4-44
Copy Function: o3
Param-
BUS Page
Register
Copy func- 0: Normal operation
tion selection 1: READ (Inverter to
Operator)
o3-01 0 to 3 0 No A A A 515H 5-56
Copy Func- 2: COPY (Operator to
tion Sel Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
Read permis-
sion selection 0: READ prohibited
o3-02 0 or 1 0 No A A A 516H 5-56
Copy 1: READ permitted
Allowable
Lift Function Parameters: S
S1 Brake Sequence

Control Methods
4
Name Change MEMO-
Param-
BUS Page
Register
DC injection
braking cur- Sets the DC injection braking
0 to
S1-02 rent at start current as a percentage of the 50% No A A No 681H -
100
DC Inj I Inverter rated current.
@start
DC injection
braking curr- Sets the DC injection braking
0 to
S1-03 net at stop current as a percentage of the 50% No A A No 682H -
100
DC Inj I Inverter rated current.
@stop
Used to set the time to perform
DC injection braking at start in
DC injection units of 1 second. 0.00
0.50 s
S1-04 braking time Used to stop coasting motor to No A A A 18BH -
*
at start and restart it. When the set 10.00
value is 0, DC injection brak-
ing at start is not performed.
Used to set the time to perform
DC injection braking at stop in
units of 1 second.
DC injection 0.00
Used to prevent coasting after
S1-05 braking time to 0.60 s No A A A 18CH -
the stop command is input.
at stop 10.00
When the set value is 0.00, DC
injection braking at stop is not
performed.
Brake release
delay time Used to set the time to output 0.00
S1-06 Brake release command in to 0.20 No A A A 685H -
Brake open units of 1second. 10.00
delay
Brake close
delay time Used to set the time to output 0.00
S1-07 Brake close command in units to 0.10 No A A A 685H -
Brake of 1second. S1-05
CloseDelay
4-45
Param-
BUS Page
Register
SE2 detec- Used to set the time to detect
tion delay SE2 fault in units of 1ms. 0
time When the inverter output cur- to
S1-14 200ms No A A A 6A1H -
rent is below S1-08 setting S1-04 -
SE2 det T after passing S1-06+S1-14 S1-06
time,SE2 will be detected.
SE3 detec- Used to set the time to detect
tion delay SE3 fault in units of 1ms.
0
time When Inverter output currnet
S1-15 to 200ms No A A A 6A2H -
is below S1-08 setting for S1-
5000
SE3 det T 15 time continuously, SE3 will
be detected.
RUN delay 0.00
time Used to set RUN-delay time in to
S1-16 0.10sec No A A A 6A3H -
unit of 1 second 1.00
Run Delay T
DC injection
current gain
at regenera- Used to set the DC injection 0
S1-17 tion gain when inveter is in the to 100% No No A No 6A4H -
regerenative mode. 400
DC Inj
gain@gen
DC injection
current gain Used to set the DC injection 0
S1-18 at motoring gain when inveter is in the to 20% No No A No 6A5H -
DC Inj motoring mode. 400
gain@mot
Output con-
tactor open Used to set the delay time to 0.00
S1-19 delay time close the output contactor in to 0.10sec No A A A 6A6H -
Cont open units of 1 second. 1.00
delay
Zero-servo Adjust the strength of the zero-
gain servo lock.
When the closed loop vector
control is selected, a position
control loop is created and the
S1-20 0 to 100 5 No No No A 6A7H -
Zero Servo motor stops at start or stop.
Gain Increasing the zero-servo gain
in turn increases the strength of
the lock. Increasing it by too
much will cause oscillation.
Zero-servo Sets the output width of the P-
completion lock completion signal.
width The zero-servo completion sig-
nal is ON when the current
position is within the range
(the zero-servo position + 0 to
S1-21 10 No No No A 6A8H -
zero-servo completion width.) 16383
Zero Servo Set the allowable position dis-
Count placement from the zero-servo
position to 4 times the pulse
rate of the PG (pulse generator,
encoder) in use.
Torque com-
pensation Sets the time to torque refer- 0
S1-22 time at start ence to reach to 300% torque to 500ms No No No A 6A9H -
reference in units of 1ms. 5000
Torque incr T
4-46

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Torque com-
pensation
gain during Sets the torque compensation 0.500
S1-23 lowering to 1.000 No No No A 6AAH -
gain at lowering.
10.000
TorqComp-
gain@low
Torque com-
pensation
bias during -200.0
S1-24 raising to 0.0% No No No A 6ABH -
bias at raising.
+200.0
TorqComp-
Bias@rai
Torque com-
pensation
bias during -200.0
S1-25 lowering to 0.0% No No No A 6ACH -
bias at lowering.
+200.0
TorqComp-
Bias@low
Dwell speed Hold speed reference when
reference the load is heavy.The fre-
S1-26
quency reference follows the
C1-07 acceleration 4 setting
time.
0.0
0.0Hz No A A A 6ADH -
4
DWELL to 120.0
Acceleration time will be
speed changed when the motor speed
exceeds the C1-11 setting fre-
quency.
Frequency S1-27 setting is enable at stop-
detection at ping.
stop Multi-function digital
ouput(setting 42) is closed
0.0
S1-27 when output frequency or 0.0Hz No A A A 6ADH -
to 120.0
Freq Det motor speed( CLV)is below
@Stop S1-27 setting .This signal is
used for lift door control.
* The factory setting will change when the control method is change. (The Close Loop Vector factory setting is given.)
4-47
S2 Slip compensation for lift
Param-
BUS Page
Register
Motor rated 300
speed Sets the motor rated speed in to 1380
S2-01 No A No No 6AEH -
units of 1 rpm 1800 rpm
Rated rpm
Slip compen-
sation gain at Sets the slip compensation 0.0
S2-02 motoring gain when the leveling to 0.7 Yes A A No 6AFH -
SlipComp accuracy is needed . 2.5
gainMot
Slip compen-
sation gain at Sets the slip compensation
0.0
gain when the leveling
S2-03 regenerating to 1.0 Yes A A No 6B0H -
accuracy is needed .
SlipComp 2.5
gainGen
Slip compen- Slip compensation primary
sation pri- delay time is set in ms units.
mary delay Usually setting is not neces-
time sary.
Adjust this constant at the fol-
0
lowing times.
S2-07 to 200ms No No A No 6B4H -
• Reduce the setting when slip
10000
SlipComp- compensation responsive is
Delay T slow.
• When speed is not stabi-
lized, increase the setting.
S3 Lift specific function

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Short-floor
funciton Short-floor function selection
S3-01 selection 0:disabled 0 or 1 0 No A A A 6BDH -
Short floor 1:enabled
sel
4-48
T: Motor Autotuning

Param-
BUS Page
Register
Autotuning Sets the autotuning mode.
mode selec- 0: Rotating autotuning
T1-01 tion 1: Non-rotating autotuning 0 to 2 *1 1 No Yes Yes Yes 701H -
Tuning Mode 2: Non-rotating autotuning for
Sel line-to-line resistance only
Motor out-
put power Sets the output power of the 0.00 to 3.7 kW
T1-02 No Yes Yes Yes 702H -
Mtr Rated motor in kilowatts. 650.00 *2
Power
Motor rated
voltage 0 to
Sets the rated voltage of the 200.0 V
T1-03 255.0 No No Yes Yes 703H -
Rated motor. *3
*3
Voltage
Motor rated
current 0.32 to
Sets the rated current of the 14.00 A
T1-04 6.40 No Yes Yes Yes 704H -
Rated motor. *2
*4
Current
4
Motor base
frequency Sets the base frequency of the 0 to
T1-05 60.0 Hz No No Yes Yes 705H -
Rated Fre- motor. 120.0
quency
Number of
motor poles Sets the number of motor 2 to 48
T1-06 4 poles No No Yes Yes 706H -
Number of poles. poles
Poles
Motor base
Sets the base speed of the 0 to 1450
T1-07 speed No No Yes Yes 707H -
motor in r/min. 24000 r/min
Rated Speed
Number of
PG pulses Sets the number of PG pulses 0 to
T1-08 1024 No No No Yes 708H -
PG Pulses/ per revolution. 60000
Rev
No load cur-
rent 0.0 to
Sets the no load currnet of
T1-09 1.89 E2-03 No No Yes Yes 709H -
No load cur- motor. *2
rent
* 1. Set T1-02 and T1-04 when 2 is set for T1-01. For V/f control or V/f control with PG a set value 2 is possible only.
* 2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 3.7 kW is given.)
* 3. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 4. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 3.7 kW is given.)
4-49
U: Monitor Parameters
Status Monitor Parameters: U1
Name Output Signal Level Dur- Control Methods MEMO-

Param- Min.
eter Description ing Multi-Function Ana- Open Closed BUS
Number Unit V/f Loop Loop Register
Display log Output Vector Vector
Frequency
reference Monitors/sets the frequency 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-01 A A A 40H
Frequency reference value.* (0 to ± 10 V possible) Hz
Ref
Output fre-
Monitors the output fre- 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-02 quency A A A 41H
quency.* (0 to ± 10 V possible) Hz
Output Freq
Output cur- 10 V: Inverter rated output
rent current
U1-03 Monitors the output current. 0.1 A A A A 42H
Output (0 to +10 V, absolute value
Current output)
Control
method Displays the current control
U1-04 (Cannot be output.) - A A A 43H
Control method.
Method
Motor speed 10 V: Max. frequency
Monitors the detected motor 0.01
U1-05 (0 to ± 10 V possible) No A A 44H
Motor Speed speed.* Hz
Output volt-
age Monitors the output voltage 10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
U1-06 0.1 V A A A 45H
Output reference value. (0 to +10 V output)
Voltage
DC bus volt-
age 10 V: 400 VDC
Monitors the main DC bus
U1-07 (800 VDC) 1V A A A 46H
DC Bus Volt- voltage.
(0 to +10 V output)
age
Output 10 V: Inverter capacity
power Monitors the output power (max. applicable motor 0.1
U1-08 A A A 47H
Output (internally detected value). capacity) kW
kWatts (0 to ± 10 V possible)
Torque refer-
ence Monitors the internal torque
10 V: Motor rated torque
U1-09 reference value for open vec- 0.1% No A A 48H
Torque (0 to ± 10 V possible)
tor control.
Reference
* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).
4-50
Name Control Methods MEMO-

Param- Output Signal Level
Min. Open Closed BUS
eter Description During Multi-Function
Number Unit V/f Loop Loop Regis-
Display Analog Output Vector Vector ter
Input termi- Shows input ON/OFF status.
nal status
1: FWD command
(S1) is ON
1: REV command
(S2) is ON
1: Multi input 1
(S3) is ON
1: Multi input 2
U1-10 (S4) is ON (Cannot be output.) - A A A 49H
Input Term
1: Multi input 3
Sts (S5) is ON
1: Multi input 4
(S6) is ON
1: Multi input 5
(S7) is ON
Output termi- Shows output ON/OFF status.

nal status
1: Multi-function
contact output 1
(M1-M2) is ON
1: Multi-function
4
contact output 2
(M3-M4) is ON
U1-11 1: Multi-function (Cannot be output.) - A A A 4AH

Output Term contact output 3
(M5-M6) is ON
Sts
Not used
(Always 0).
1: Error output
(MA/MB-MC) is
ON
Operation Inverter operating status.

status
Run
1: Zero speed
1: Reverse
1: Reset signal
input
U1-12 1: Speed agree (Cannot be output.) - A A A 4BH
Int Ctl Sts 1 1: Inverter ready
1: Minor fault
1: Major fault
CumulativeMonitors the total operating

operation time of the Inverter.
time The initial value and the oper- 1
U1-13 (Cannot be output.) A A A 4CH
ating time/power ON time hr
Elapsed Time selection can be set in o2-07
and o2-08.
Software No.
(flash mem-
U1-14 ory) (Manufacturer’s ID number) (Cannot be output.) - A A A 4DH
FLASH ID
Terminal A1 Monitors the input level of
input level analog input A1. A value of 10 V: 100%
U1-15 0.1% A A A 4EH
Term A1 100% corresponds to 10V (0 to ± 10 V possible)
Level input.
4-51
Terminal A2 Monitors the input level of
input level analog input A2. A value of 10 V/20mA: 100%
U1-16 0.1% A A A 4FH
Term A2 100% corresponds to 10V/ (0 to ±10 V possible)
Level 20mA input.
Motor sec- Monitors the calculated value

ondary cur- of the motor secondary cur-
10 V:Motor rated current)
U1-18 rent (Iq) rent. 0.1% A A A 51H
(0 to ±10 V output)
Mot SEC The motor rated current corre-
Current sponds to 100%.
Motor excita- Monitors the calculated value

tion current of the motor excitation cur-
(Id) rent. 10 V:Motor rated current)
U1-19 0.1% No A A 52H
The motor rated current corre- (0 to ±10 V output)
Mot EXC sponds to 100%.
current
Frequency Monitors the frequency refer-

reference ence after the soft starter.
after soft- This frequency value does not 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01H
U1-20 A A A 53H
starter include compensations, such (0 to ± 10 V possible) z
as slip compensation.
SFS Output The unit is set in o1-03.
ASR input Monitors the input to the
speed control loop. 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-21 No No A 54H
ASR Input The maximum frequency cor- (0 to ± 10 V possible) %
responds to 100%.
ASR output Monitors the output from the
10 V:Max. frequency
speed control loop. 0.01
U1-22 (0 to ± 10 V possible) No No A 55H
ASR output The maximum frequency cor- %
responds to 100%.
DI-16H2 Monitors the reference value
input status
from a DI-16H2 Digital Ref-
erence Card. 58H
U1-25 (Cannot be output.) - A A A
DI-16 Refer- The value will be displayed in
ence binary or BCD depending on
user constant F3-01.
Output volt-
age refer- Monitors the Inverter internal 10 V: 200 VAC
U1-26 ence (Vq) voltage reference for motor (400 VAC) 0.1 V No A A 59H
Voltage secondary current control. (0 to ± 10 V possible)
Ref(Vq)
Output volt-
age refer- Monitors the Inverter internal 10 V: 200 VAC
U1-27 ence (Vd) voltage reference for motor (400 VAC) 0.1 V No A A 5AH
Voltage excitation current control. (0 to ± 10 V possible)
Ref(Vd)
Software No.
(Manufacturer’s CPU soft-
U1-28 (CPU) (Cannot be output.) - A A A 5BH
ware No.)
CPU ID
ACR output
of q axis Monitors the current control
10 V: 100% 0.1
U1-32 output value for the motor No A A 5FH
ACR(q) (0 to ± 10 V possible) %
secondary current.
Output
ACR output Monitors the current control
10 V: 100% 0.1
U1-33 of d axis output value for the motor No A A 60H
(0 to ± 10 V possible) %
ACR(d) axis excitation current.
4-52

OPE fault
parameter Shows the first parameter
U1-34 number when an OPE fault is (Cannot be output.) - A A A 61H
OPE detected.
Detected
Zero sevo Shows the number of PG
movement pulses of the movement range
U1-35 pulses when zero servo was acti- (Cannot be output.) - No No A 62H
Zero Servo vated. The shown value is the
Pulse actual pulse numer times 4.
MEMOBUS Shows MEMOBUS errors.
communica-
tions error
1: CRC error
code
1: Data length error
Not used
1: Parity error
U1-39 (Cannot be output.) - A A A 66H
1: Overrun error
Transmit Err 1: Framing error
4
1: Timeout
Cooling fan
operating Monitors the total operating
time of the cooling fan. The 1
U1-40 time (Cannot be output.) A A A 67H
time can be set in hr
FAN Elapsed 02-10.
Time
ASR output
without filter Monitors the output from the
speed control loop (i.e., the 10 V: Rated secondary current
0.01
U1-44 primary filter input value). of motor No No A 6BH
ASR Output 100% is displayed for rated %
(-10 V to 10 V)
w Fil secondary current of the
motor.
Feed for-
ward control Monitors the output from feed
output 10 V: Rated secondary current
forward control. 100% is dis- 0.01
U1-45 of motor No No A 6CH
FF Cout Out- played for rated secondary (-10 V to 10 V)
%
put current of the motor.
Slip compen-
sation value Monitors the slip compensa-
tion value.100% is displayed 10 V: Rated slip of motor 0.01
U1-50 Slip comp A A A 71H
for rated slip ( -10 V to 10 V) %
value
Max Current
during accel-
eration Monitors the maximum curr- 10 V: Rated current of motor
U1-51 0.1 A A A A 72H
Max Amp net during acceleration. (0 V to 10 V)
at accel
Max Current
during decel-
eration Monitors the maximum curr- 10 V: Rated current of motor
U1-52 0.1 A A A A 73H
Max Amp net during deceleration. (0 V to 10 V)
at decel
4-53
Max Current
during Top
speed Monitors the maximum curr- 10 V: Rated current of motor
U1-53 0.1 A A A A 74H
Max Amp net at top speed. (0 V to 10 V)
at top speed
Max Current
during level-
ing speed Monitors the maximum curr- 10 V: Rated current of motor
U1-54 0.1 A A A A 75H
Max Amp net at Vl speed. (0 V to 10 V)
at Vl sped
Operation
counter Monitors the lift operation
U1-55 Operation coumter . (Cannot be output.) times A A A 76H
Cnt O2-15 can clear this counter.
4-54
Fault Trace: U2
Name Output Signal Level Control Methods MEMO-

Param- Min.
eter Description During Multi-Func- Open Closed BUS
Number Unit V/f Loop Loop
Display tion Analog Output Vector Vector
Register
Current fault
U2-01 The content of the current fault. - A A A 80H
Current Fault
Last fault
U2-02 The error content of the last fault. - A A A 81H
Last Fault
Reference
frequency at
The reference frequency when the 0.01
U2-03 fault A A A 82H
last fault occurred. Hz
Frequency
Ref
Output fre-
quency at The output frequency when the 0.01
last fault occurred. Hz
Output Freq
Output cur-
rent at fault The output current when the last
U2-05 0.1 A A A A 84H
Output fault occurred.
Current
Motor speed
U2-06 at fault
The motor speed when the last 0.01
No A A 85H
4
fault occurred. Hz
Motor Speed
Output volt-
age refer-
The output reference voltage
U2-07 ence at fault 0.1 V A A A 86H
when the last fault occurred.
Output
Voltage
DC bus volt- (Cannot be output.)
age at fault The main current DC voltage
U2-08 1V A A A 87H
DC Bus Volt- when the last fault occurred.
age
Output
power at
The output power when the last 0.1
fault occurred. kW
Output
kWatts
Torque refer-
ence at fault The reference torque when the last
U2-10 fault occurred. The motor rated 0.1% No No A 89H
Torque torque corresponds to 100%.
Reference
Input termi-
nal status at The input terminal status when the
last fault occurred.
U2-11 fault - A A A 8AH
The format is the same as for U1-
Input Term 10.
Sts
Output termi-
nal status at The output terminal status when
U2-12 fault the last fault occurred. The format - A A A 8BH
Output Term is the same as for U1-11.
Sts
Operation
status at fault The operating status when the last
U2-13 fault occurred. The format is the - A A A 8CH
Inverter Sta- same as for U1-12.
tus
4-55
Name Output Signal Level Control Methods MEMO-
Param- Min.
eter Description During Multi-Func- Open Closed BUS
Number Unit V/f Loop Loop
Display tion Analog Output Vector Vector
Register
Cumulative
operation The operating time when the last 1
U2-14 time at fault (Cannot be output.) A A A 8DH
fault occurred. hr
Elapsed Time
The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
4-56
Fault History: U3
Parame- Name Output Signal Level Dur-

Min. MEMOBUS
ter Num- Description ing Multi-Function Analog
ber Unit Register
Display Output
Last fault
U3-01 The error content of 1st last fault. - 90H
Last Fault
Second last fault

U3-02 The error content of 2nd last fault. - 91H
Fault Message 2
Third last fault

U3-03 The error content of 3rd last fault. - 92H
Fault Message 3
Fourth last fault

U3-04 The error content of 4th last fault. - 93H
Fault Message 4
Cumulative operation
time at fault The total operating time when the 1st previous 1
U3-05 94H
fault occurred. hr
Elapsed Time 1
Accumulated time of
U3-06
second fault The total operating time when the 2nd previous
fault occurred. (Cannot be output.)
1
hr
95H 4
Elapsed Time 2
Accumulated time of
third fault The total operating time when the 3rd previous 1
U3-07 96H
fault occurred. hr
Elapsed Time 3
Accumulated time of
fourth/oldest fault The total operating time when the 4th previous 1
U3-08 97H
fault occurred. hr
Elapsed Time 4
Fifth last to tenth last 804

fault 805H
U3-09 – 806H
The error content of the 5th to 10th last fault –
U3-14 807H
Fault Message 5 to 10 808H
809H
Accumulated time of 806H
fifth to tenth fault 80FH
U3-15 – Total generating time when 5th ... 10th pevious 810H
1hr
U3-20 fault occured 811H
Elapsed Time 5 to 10 812H
813H
The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
4-57
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)
Factory Setting
Param- Open Closed
eter V/f Con-
Num-
Name Setting Range Unit Loop Loop
trol
ber Vector Vector
A1-02=0
A1-02=2 A1-02=3
C3-01 Slip compensation gain 0.0 to 2.5 - 1.0 1.0 1.0
C3-02 Slip compensation delay time 0 to 10000 - 2000 200 0
C4-02 Torque compensation delay time constant 0 to 10000 - 200 50 0
E1-07 Mid. output frequency voltage 0.0 to 120.0 0.1 Hz 3.0 3.0 0
0.0 to 255.0 15.0
E1-08 Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)*2 0.1 V 11.0 0.0
(0.0 to 510.0) *2*3
0.0 to 120.0 1.5
E1-09 Min. output frequency (FMIN) 0.1 Hz 0.5 0.0
*4 *2
0.0 to 255.0 9.0
E1-10 Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)*2 0.1 V 2.0 0.0
(0.0 to 510.0) *2*3
S1-04 DC injection braking time at stop 0.00 to 10.00 0.01 sec 0.50 0.30 0.00
* 1. The settings are 0.05 (Closed Loop Vector) / 2.00 (Open Loop vector) for inverters of 55kW or larger.
* 2. Settings value as shown in the following tables depending on the Inverter capacity and E1-03.
* 3. The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
4-58
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 3.7 to 45 kW*
Para
meter
Num-
Unit Factory Setting Open
Loop
Closed
Loop
Vector Vector
ber Control Control
E1-03 - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
E1-04 Hz 50.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 180.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-05
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
*
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-07
Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 0.0
*
E1-08
V 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 18.0 23.0 18.0 23.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 15.0 11.0 0.0
*
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 0.0
E1-10
V 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.0 7.0 6.0 7.0 9.0 11.0 9.0 13.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 9.0 2.0 0.0
*
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
200 V Class Inverters of 55 kW

Para
meter
Unit Factory Setting Open Closed
4
Num- Loop Loop
Vector Vector
ber Control Control
E1-03 - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
E1-04 Hz 50.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 180.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-05
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
*
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-07
Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 0.0
*
E1-08
V 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 15.0 20.0 15.0 20.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 11.0 0.0
*
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 0.0
E1-10
V 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 9.0 7.0 11.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 2.0 0.0
*
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
4-59
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
200 V Class Inverters
Parameter Factory Setting

Number
Name Unit
- Inverter Capacity kW 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22

o2-04 kVA selection - 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
E2-01
Motor rated current A 14.00 19.60 26.60 39.7 53.0 65.8 77.2
(E4-01)
E2-02
Motor rated slip Hz 2.73 1.50 1.30 1.70 1.60 1.67 1.70
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor no-load current A 4.50 5.10 8.00 11.2 15.2 15.7 18.5
(E4-03)
E2-05
Motor line-to-line resistance W 0.771 0.399 0.288 0.230 0.138 0.101 0.079
(E4-05)
E2-06
Motor leak inductance % 19.6 18.2 15.5 19.5 17.2 20.1 19.5
(E4-06)
Motor iron loss for torque
E2-10 W 112 172 262 245 272 505 538
compensation
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 75 75 75 80 65 75 75
4-60
400 V Class Inverters

Number
Name Unit
- Inverter Capacity kW 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15

o2-04 kVA selection - 4 5 5 6 7 8
E2-01
Motor rated current A 7.00 7.00 9.80 13.30 19.9 26.5
(E4-01)
E2-02
Motor rated slip Hz 2.70 2.70 1.50 1.30 1.70 1.60
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor no-load current A 2.30 2.30 2.60 4.00 5.6 7.6
(E4-03)
E2-05
Motor line-to-line resistance W 3.333 3.333 1.595 1.152 0.922 0.550
(E4-05)
E2-06
Motor leak inductance % 19.3 19.3 18.2 15.5 19.6 17.2
(E4-06)
E2-10 W 130 130 193 263 385 440
compensation
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 90 90 85 90 73 90

Name Unit
Number
- Inverter Capacity kW 18.5 22 30 37 45 55

4
o2-04 kVA selection - 4 5 6 7 8 9
E2-01
Motor rated current A 32.9 38.6
(E4-01)
E2-02
Motor rated slip Hz 1.67 1.70
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor no-load current A 7.8 9.2
(E4-03)
E2-05 Development
Motor line-to-line resistance W 0.403 0.316
(E4-05)
E2-06
Motor leak inductance % 20.1 23.5
(E4-06)
E2-10 W 508 586
compensation
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 80 80
4-61
4-62
Parameter Settings by
Function
Current Derating and Limitation related to the Carrier Fre-
quency ..........................................................................5-2
5
Control Sequence ........................................................5-4
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ..........5-17
Adjusting Analog Input Signals ..................................5-22
Speed Detection and Speed Limitation......................5-23
Improving the Operation Performance.......................5-26
Protective Functions ..................................................5-34
Inverter Protection .....................................................5-40
Input Terminal Functions............................................5-43
Output Terminal Functions.........................................5-47
Motor and V/f Pattern Setup ......................................5-50
Digital Operator/Monitor Functions ............................5-54
PG Interface...............................................................5-62
Battery Operation.......................................................5-64
Automatic Fault Restart .............................................5-67
Current Derating and Limitation related to
the Carrier Frequency
The inverter rated current derating and limitation are changed by carrier frequency setting.
Related Parameters
Parameter Factory during Open Closed
Name
No. Setting Opera- V/f Loop Loop
tion Vector Vector
C6-02 Carrier frequency selection 3 (8 kHz) No Q Q Q
Rated Carrent Derating

The inverter overload capability depends on the carrier frequency setting.
If the carrier frequency is increased, a derating for the rated current like shown in Fig 5.1 must be considered.
Output current (%) 100% Rated Current

3 minutes 50% ED
125% 200V Class 22kW or less

400V Class 22kW or less
100%
75%
200V Class 30 to 55kW

400V Class 30 to 55kW
Carrier
frequency
0
2 5 8 10 15 (kHz)
Fig 5.1 Current Derating depending on the carrier frequency
5-2
Current Derating and Limitation related to the Carrier Frequency
Current limit level

Varispeed L7 limits the output current at low frequencies. Current limit level that change with the inverter
capacity. The current limitation in the low frequency is as follows.
150%
140% 200V Class 15kW
400V Class 30kW
130%
120% 200V Class 3.7, 18, 30kW
400V Class 18, 22kW
110%
200V Class 5.5kW
400V Class 3.7, 5.5, 7.5, 11, 55kW
200V Class11kW
200V Class 7.5, 22 , 37, 45, 55kW

400V Class 4.0, 15, 37, 45kW
Output
0 1.5Hz 3Hz 4.5Hz 6Hz Frequency
Fig 5.2 Low frequency current limitation
• If the torque at low frequencies is too low, check wheather the current runs into the limitation
explained above. If so, check the motor data settings (E2-) and the V/f pattern (E1-).
• If the current still runs into the limit it might be necessary to install a one size bigger inverter.
• When selecting an inverter please consider the low frequency current limit as described above and
IMPORTANT
select an inverter with an appropriate current margin.
• Check the Motor data settings to reduce the starting Current.
• If the starting current is bigger than the current limit, apply the bigger size inverter.
5-3
Control Sequence
Run Commands
Run
To start the elevator in Up or Down direction, the following conditions have to be fulfilled:
• Speed reference must be selected.
• The hardware base block signal must be released (not base block condition).
• The contactor confirmation signal must be closed when it is selected.
• To start to the UP direction, the Forward run signal must be set. To start in Reverse run direction the Down
signal must be set.
DI DI DI DI
Inverter Speed UP or Down Contactor
ready Selection Control
Stop
The elevator can be stopped as follows:
• The Run command (Forward or Reverse) signal is removed.
• The speed reference selection signal is removed.
Run Command Source Selection

The input source for the forward/reverse signal can be selected in parameter b1-02.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Parameter Factory Open Closed
Name during
No. Setting V/f Loop Loop
Operation
Vector Vector
b1-02 RUN command source selection 1 No Q Q Q
Forward/Reverse Commands Using the Digital Operator (b1-02=0)

When b1-02 is set to 0 the Forward/Reverse command must be input using the Digital Operator keys (RUN,
STOP, and FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operator refer to page 3-1, Digital Operator and Modes.
This operation can be used for test purposes only.
Forward/Reverse Commands Using Control Circuit Terminals (b1-02=1, factory setting)

When b1-02 is set to 1 the Forward/Reverse command is input at the control circuit terminals S1 and S2. This
is the factory setting and the most common configuration.
Forward/Reverse Commands Using Memobus Communications (b1-02=2)

When b1-02 is set to 2 the Forward/Reverse command can be set using Memobus communications.
5-4
Control Sequence
Forward/Reverse Commands Using an Input Option Card (b1-02=3)

When b1-02 is set to 3 the Forward/Reverse command can be set using an input option card, for example a
field bus communications card.
Speed Reference Source Selection
Speed Reference Source Selection

The speed reference source can be selected using parameter b1-01.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
b1-01 Frequency reference source selection 0 No Q Q Q
Input the Speed Reference from the Digital Inputs (b1-01=0)

When b1-01 is set to 0, the speed reference can be selected from preset speeds using the digital inputs of the
inverter. Refer to page 5-6, Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs for details.
Input the Speed Reference Using a Voltage Signal (b1-01=1)

When b1-01 is set to 1, d1-18=0 and H3-15 (Input function for A1) is set to 0 (Frequency reference), the speed
reference can be input by the terminal A1 as a 0 to +10V signal. If an analog option card AI-14B is installed, 5
the A1 signal is replaced by the Channel 1 input of the AI card.
The analog reference signal can be used as well as 1st speed if multi-speed operation is selected (d1-18=0)
(Refer to page 5-6, Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs for details)
Input the Speed Reference Using Memobus Communications (b1-01=2)

When b1-01 is set to 2 the speed reference can be input using Memobus communications.
Input the Speed Reference Using an Input Option Card (b1-01=3)

When b1-01 is set to 3 the speed reference can be input using an input option card, for example a field bus
communications card.
5-5
Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs
If the digtal inputs are used for speed selection, the speed selection method and the speed priority depends on
the setting of parameter d1-18.
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
d1-18 Speed Priority Selection 0 No Q Q Q
Multi-Step Speed Operation (Binary Input) (d1-18=0)

Maximum 8 preset speed steps can be selected using 3 binary coded digital inputs. The inverter is started using
the Forward/Reverse command. It stops when the Forward/Reverse command is removed.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
d1-01 to
Multi-Step speed 1 to 8 reference value 0.00 Hz Yes A A A
d1-08
Multi-function Digital Input Settings (H1-01 to H1-05) (Example)
Parameter
Terminal Set Value Details
Number
S4 H1-02 3 Multi-step speed command 1
Speed Selection Table

The following table shows the combinations of the digital input and the according speed.
If b1-02 is set to “1”, speed 1 is input as analog reference at terminal A1 or Channel CH1 of an analog input
option card AI-14B if it is installed.
If an AI-14B option card is used and the function for channel 2 and 3 is set for “Auxiliary Frequency 2”
(H3-05/09=2) and “Auxiliary Frequency 3” (H3-05/09=3) the speeds 2 and 3 are set at the CH2 and CH3 input
of the option card.l
Multi-step Speed Multi-step Speed Multi-step Speed

Speed Selected Frequency
Command 1 Command 2 Command 3
1 OFF OFF OFF Frequency reference 1 d1-01 or A1/AI-14B CH1

2 ON OFF OFF Frequency reference 2 d1-02 or AI-14B CH2
3 OFF ON OFF Frequency reference 3 d1-03 or AI-14B CH3
4 ON ON OFF Frequency reference 4 d1-04
5 OFF OFF ON Frequency reference 5 d1-05
6 ON OFF ON Frequency reference 6 d1-06
7 OFF ON ON Frequency reference 7 d1-07
8 ON ON ON Frequency reference 8 d1-08
5-6
Control Sequence
Separate Speed Selection Inputs, High Speed Has Priority (d1-18=1)

With this setting 6 different speeds can be set and selected using four digital inputs.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change Digital Input
Name during Setting (H1-01 to
Operation H1-05)
Vector Vector
d1-09 Nominal Speed 50.00 Hz Yes Q Q Q 80
d1-10 Intermediate Speed 1 0.00 Hz Yes A A A 81
d1-11 Intermediate Speed 2 0.00 Hz Yes A A A -*
d1-12 Intermediate Speed 3 0.00 Hz Yes A A A -*
d1-13 Releveling Speed 0.00 Hz Yes A A A 82
d1-17 Leveling Speed 4.00 Hz Yes Q Q Q 83
* This speed can be selected by a combination of two inputs
Digital Input Factory Settings

Parameter
Terminal Set Value Details
Number
S3 H1-01 24 External Fault
S4 H1-02 14 Fault Reset
S5 H1-03 3 Multi-step speed command1
S6 H1-04 4 Multi-step speed command2
S7 H1-05 6 JOG reference
Higher Speed has Priority and a Leveling Speed Input is Selected (H1-=83) 5
If d1-18 is set to 1 and one multi-function digital input is set for the leveling speed (H1-=83) after remov-
ing the selected speed signal the inverter decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-17). The selected speed must be
different from leveling speed and inspection speed. The higher speed has priority over the leveling speed, i.e.
as long as a higher speed is selected the leveling signal is disregarded (see the fig. below)
The inverter stops when the leveling signal or the Forward/Reverse command signal is removed.
DC Injection/ DC Injection/
zero servo Leveling speed zero servo
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Donw
Leveling speed No effect

Selected speed Input is set
The following speed selection table shows the different speeds and the according digital inputs.
When the speed selection which the table is not shown is selected, the inverter keeps running the previous
speed reference.
Nominal Intermed. Intermed. Intermed. Relevel. Leveling
Terminal function Speed Speed 1 Speed 2 Speed 3 Speed Speed 0Hz
d1-09 d1-10 d1-11 d1-12 d1-13 d1-17
Nominal Speed command (H1-=80) 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
Intermediate speed command (H1-=81) 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
Releveling speed command (H1-=82) 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
Leveling speed command (H1-=83) X X X X X 1 0
* 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled, X = no meaning
5-7
Higher Speed Priority is Selected and no Leveling Speed Input is Selected (H1-=83)
When the leveling speed command is not selected for any digital input, the inverter decelerates to the leveling
speed (d1-17) when all selected speed signals are removed. The selected speed must be different from leveling
and inspection speed.
The inverter stops when the Forward/Reverse command signal is removed.
When no speed selection input is enabled, leveling speed is the speed reference.
zero servo zero servo
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Down
Selected speed
Terminal function Speed Speed 1 Speed 2 Speed 3 Speed Speed
d1-09 d1-10 d1-11 d1-12 d1-13 d1-17
Nominal Speed command (H1-=80) 1 0 1 0 0 0
Intermediate speed command (H1-=81) 0 1 1 1 0 0
Releveling speed command (H1-=82) 0 0 1 1 1 0
Leveling speed command (H1-=83) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
* 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled, N/A = not available
To make the inverter stop must be remove the direction signal(Forward/Reverse signal).
Separate Speed Selection Inputs, Leveling Speed Has Priority (d1-18=2)

The related parameters and the digital input pre-settings are the same as for the High Speed Priority setting
(d1-18=1).
Leveling Speed has Priority and a Leveling Speed Input is Selected (H1-=83)
If d1-18 is set to “2” and one multi-function digital input is set for the leveling speed (H1-=83) the
inverter decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-17) as soon as the leveling speed selection input is activated. The
leveling signal has priority over the selected speed, i.e. the selected speed is disregarded. The selected speed
must be different from leveling speed and inspection speed.
The inverter stops when all speed command is removed or the Forward/Reverse signal is removed.
Once the leveling speed is selected, the inverter keeps running at the leveling speed until above condition
meet.
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Down
Leveling speed Leveling speed has priority
Selected speed
5-8
Control Sequence
Terminal function Speed Speed 1 Speed 2 Speed 3 Speed Speed 0Hz
d1-09 d1-10 d1-11 d1-12 d1-13 d1-17
Nominal Speed command (H1-=80) 1 0 1 0 0 × 0
Intermediate speed command (H1-=81) 0 1 1 1 0 × 0
Releveling speed command (H1-=82) 0 0 1 1 1 × 0
Leveling speed command (H1-=83) { { { { { 1 0
* 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled, X = no meaning
Leveling Speed Priority is Selected and no Nominal Speed Input is Not Selected (H1-K80)
If d1-18 is set to “2” and no digital input is set for the nominal speed at no speed selection input the speed ref-
erence is nominal speed (d1-09). When the leveling speed signal is set, the inverter starts to decelerate to the
leveling speed. The leveling speed signal has priority over all other speed signals, i.e. the intermediate speed 1
and 2 and the releveling signals are disregarded when leveling speed is selected.
The inverter can be stopped by removing the Forward/Reverse command.
CAUTION: When the speed selection wires are broken, the nominal speed will be selected instead of stop.
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Down
Leveling speed
5
Terminal function Speed Speed 1 Speed 2 Speed 3 Speed Speed
d1-09 d1-10 d1-11 d1-12 d1-13 d1-17
Nominal Speed command (H1-=80) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Intermediate speed command (H1-=81) 0 1 − 1 0 X
Releveling speed command (H1-=82) 0 0 − 1 1 X
Leveling speed command (H1-=83) 0 0 − 0 0 1
* 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled, N/A = not available, X = no meaning
The intermediate speed 2 can not be selected using this configuration.
5-9
Emergency Stop
If a digital input terminal (H1-) is set to 15 or 17 (emergency stop), this input can be used to fast stop the
inverter in the case of emergency. In this case the emergency stop deceleration time set in C1-09 is used. If
inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-) to 15, and if
inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-) to 17.
After the emergency stop command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has
stopped. To cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command.
Related parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
C1-09 Emergency stop time 1.50 s No A A A
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Control Methods
Open Closed
Set Value Function
V/f Loop Loop
Vector Vector
15 Emergency Stop, NO contact Yes Yes Yes
17 Emergency Stop, NC contact Yes Yes Yes
Inspection RUN
A digital input can be used to activate the inspection run. Therefore a inspection speed must be set and one
digital input must be set for “Inspection Run Selection” (H1-=84).
Related parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
d1-14 Inspection Speed 25.00 Hz No A A A

Control Methods
Open Closed
Set Value Function
V/f Loop Loop
Vector Vector
84 Inspection Run Selection Yes Yes Yes
5-10
Control Sequence
The inpspection run command must be set before setting the Forward/Reverse signal. During start of the
inspection RUN the normal brake sequence is used and the inverter accelerates to the inspection speed
(d1-14).
To stop the inverter, the Inspection Run command or the Forward/Reverse command must be removed. In this
case:
• The inverter output is cut by baseblock immediately
• The brake open signal is removed immediately
• The contactor control output is removed immediately
The falling edge of the inspection RUN command or Forward/Reverse commands triggers the contactor open
command , the motor brake close command and the base block .
Inspection RUN Inspection RUN

(Stop with Up/Down signal remove) (Stop with Inspection Run signal remove)
Speed Speed
Hardware BB Hardware BB
Up/Down (D/I) Up/Down (D/I)
Inspection RUN Inspection RUN

Base block Base block
MC closed (D/O) MC closed (D/O)
Brake opened (D/O) Brake opened (D/O)
Brake Sequence 5
The L7 supports two types of brake sequences, one is with torque compensation at start using an analog input
value and the other is without torque compensation at start.
Related Parameters
Control Method
Change
Name during
No. setting V/f Loop Loop
operation
Vector Vector
H3-15 Terminal A1 function selection 0 No No No A
S1-02 DC injection braking current at start 50% No A A No
S1-03 DC injection braking current at sop 50% No A A No
S1-04 DC injection braking time at start 0.30 sec No A A A
S1-05 DC injection braking time at stop 0.60 sec No A A A
S1-06 Brake open delay time 0.20 sec No A A A
S1-07 Brake close delay time 0.10 sec No A A A
S1-16 Run delay time 0.10 sec No A A A
S1-17 DC injection current gain at regeneration 100% No No A No
S1-18 DC injection current gain at motoring 20% No No A No
S1-19 Output contactor open delay time 0.10 sec No A A A
S1-20 Zero-servo gain 5 No No No A
S1-21 Zero-servo completion width 10 No No No A
S1-22 Starting torque compensation increase time 500 ms No No No A
S1-23 Torque compensation gain in Down direction 1.0 No No No A
S1-24 Torque compensation bias in Up direction 0.0 % No No No A
S1-25 Torque compensation bias in Down direction 0.0 % No No No A
5-11
Control Methods
Open Closed
Set Value Function
V/f Loop Loop
Vector Vector
Speed selection inputs (refer to <Cross Ref 8>page 5-6, Speed Selection Sequence Using
80 to 83 Yes Yes Yes
Digital Inputs)
86 Contactor closed answer back signal Yes Yes Yes
Multi-function Digital Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)

Control Methods
Open Closed
Set Value Function
V/f Loop Loop
Vector Vector
40 Brake release command Yes Yes Yes
41 Output contactor close command Yes Yes Yes
Brake Sequence without torque compensation at start

To use the brake sequence without torque compensation at start,
• the Terminal A1 function must be set to 0 (H3-15 = 0, speed reference input)
• the AI-14B Ch2 and Ch3 input functions must be set other than 14.(H3-05/09 ≠ 14, torque reference not
selected)
The figure below shows the timing chart for this breake sequence when high speed has priority and a leveling
speed input is selected.
DCInjection DCInjection
RUN Delay (200ms)
S1-04 S1-05
S1-16
brake open
delay time
brake close
delay time
Selected Speed open delay

Contactor
Leveling
S1-06 Speed S1-19
S1-07
100 ms
Speed
Up/Donw D/I
Inverter Hardware BB (D/I)
Contactor confirmation D/I
Leveling sped selection D/I stop

Selected speed (D/I)
Contactor Control D/O
Internal Run
Brake Control (D/O)
t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8 t9 t10
Fig 5.3 Timing chart of Brake sequence without torque compensation at start
5-12
Control Sequence
The timing chart above is divided in time zones. The following table explains the sequence in each time zone.
Timing Description
The inverter gets the direction signal (Forward/Reverse)
The inverter gets the hardware base block disable signal (Not BB condition).
The inverter receives the speed reference signal.
t0-t1
The inverter sets the contactor closed signal .
The inverter waits for the contactor confirmation signal. If no digital input is set for “ Contactor conformation
signal”, the sequence is proceeded after exceeding the operation start delay time (S1-16).
Inverter will activate the output after passing the “RUN Delay Time” (S1-16).
t1-t2 DC Injection/zero servo or zero speed operation is started.
After passing the “Brake Open delay time” (S1-06), the inverter starts opening the brake.
The inverter keeps DC injection/zero servo until
t2-t3 * the time S1-04 – S1-06 has exceeded if S1-06 < S1-04
* the time S1-06 has exceeded if S1-06 > S1-04 (try avoid this setting since the inverter could run against the brake)
t3-t4 The inverter starts to accelerate.
t4-t5 The inverter speed reaches the selected speed.
The speed is selection is changed to the leveling speed , the inverter starts to decelerate.
t5-t6
After reaching the leveling speed the inverter keeps operating at this speed.
t6-t7 The leveling signal is removed, the inverter ramps to stop.
The inverter reaches the zero speed.
t7-t8 The inverter starts DC injection/zero servo for the time set in S1-05.
After passing “Brake Close Delay Time” (S1-07) , the inverter activates the brake close command.
The inverter continues DC Injection/zero speed until S1-05 – S1-07 has time passed. Remove the direction signal .
t8-t9
The inverter shuts down the output voltage and the hardware base block signal must be set.
t9-t10 After the “Output contactor open delay time“ (S1-19) has passed, the inverter releases the output contactor control signal.
5-13
Brake Sequence with torque compensation at start
This sequence works in Closed Loop Vector control only. To use the brake sequence with torque compensation
at start,
• the A1 function must be selected for “Torque compensation” (H3-15=1) or
• one of the input channels Ch2 or Ch3 of the optional analog input card AI-14B must be set to “Torque
Compensation” (H3-05,H3-09=14).
The figure below shows the timing chart for this breake sequence.
Zero Speed Zero Speed
Control Control
S1-04 S1-05
RUN Delay (200ms)
vn
Brake Close
S1-16
delay time
open delay
Contactor
vl
S1-19
100ms
speed
300%torque
S1-07
torque comp
level at start Clear the
torque comp
Torque comp
increase time
S1-22
Up/Donw D/I
Inverter Hardware BB (D/I)
Contactor confirmation D/I
Leveling speed selection D/I stop

Selected speed (D/I)
Contactor Control D/O
Internal Run
Brake Control (D/O)
t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8 t9 t10
Fig 5.4 Timing chart of Brake sequence with torque compensation at start
The timing chart above is divided in time zones. The following table explains the sequence in each time zone
Timing Description
The inverter gets the direction signal (Forward/Reverse)
The inverter gets the hardware base block signal disable signal (Not BB condition).
The inverter receives the speed reference signal.
t0-t1
The inverter sets the contactor closed signal .
The inverter waits for the contactor confirmation signal. If no digital input is set for “ Contactor conformation
signal”, the sequence is proceeded after exceeding the operation start delay time (S1-16).
The Inverter will activate the output.
The zero speed operation is started.
t1-t2 The analog torque compensation value is latched and start producing the torque compensation value from Zero based on
the S1-22 (“Starting torque compensation increase time”.
After reaching torque comp level at start, the inverter sets the brake open and holds the torque compensation value until stop.
After passing zero speed operation time set in S1-04 , the inverter starts accelerating.
t2-t3
The Dwell at start function can be activated.
t3-t4 The inverter starts to accelerate.
t4-t5 The inverter speed reaches the selected speed.
When the leveling speed is selected, the inverter starts to decelerate .
t5-t6
The inverter keeps operating at the leveling speed.
t6-t7 Select 0 speed, the inverter ramps to stop.
The inverter reaches the zero speed.
t7-t8 The inverter keeps zero speed control.
After passing “Brake Close Delay Time(S1-07)” , the inverter sets the brake close.
5-14
Control Sequence
Timing Description
The inverter continues zero speed operation until the time S1-05 – S1-07 time be passed.
t8-t9 Remove the direction signal .
The inverter shuts down the output voltage and the hardware base block signal must be set.
t9-t10 After the “Output contactor open delay time” (S1-19), the inverter releases the output contactor control signal.
Torque compensation at start

If a load measuring device is installed in the elevator, in Closed Loop Vector mode an analog input can be used
to give a torque compensation value to the inverter.
The adjusted torque compensation value is latched when the direction command is given. At start it is
increased from zero to the latched value using the torque increase time set in parameter S1-22. The torque
compensation value is kept during the whole ride and is cleared when the direction command is removed.
The torque compensation function can be adjusted using the parameters shown in the block diagram below.
Adjust the parameter so that the torque compensation value is zero when the elevator is balanced.
Torque compensation
bias during raising
% S1-24
terminal A1 UP
H3-16
H3-15=1 + + direction
torque
Torque compensation
compensation H3-17
S1-23
0 10v + DOWN
+
Torque compensation gain direction
during lowering
S1-25
Torque compensation bias

during lowering 5
5-15
Short Floor Operation
Related parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
S3-01 Short floor operation 0 No A A A
Princple
The short floor operation is activated when the leveling signal is set before the nominal speed was reached.
The inverter calculates the distance for deceleration from nominal speed to the levelings speed, which is equal
to the area S in the figure below..
Speed
Nominal speed
S
Nominal Speed x 0.4
Leveling speed Leveling speed
t
0
There are two ways:

• If the leveling speed is set when 40% of the nominal speed was reached already, the inverter keeps the
reached speed until the distance equal to area S is reached. After that it decelerates to leveling speed.
• If the leveling signal is set before 40% of the nominal speed was reached, the inverter accelerates to 40%
of the nominal speed and keeps it until the distance is equal to area S is reached. After that it decelerates to
leveling speed.
Speed
40% Nominal speed
0 t
5-16
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times

The acceleration time indicates the time to increase the speed from 0% to 100% of the maximum speed set in
E1-04. The deceleration time indicates the time to decrease the speed from 100% to 0% of E1-04.
Four separate acceleration and deceleration times can be set. It can be switched over between them
• using digital input signals
• using the automatic accel./decel. time switch over function with a changable switching speed level
The display unit and the setting range for the times can be selected between 0.0 sec or 0.00sec.
Related Parameters
Name
tion Vector Vector
C1-01 Acceleration time 1 Yes Q Q Q
C1-02 Deceleration time 1 Yes Q Q Q
C1-03 Acceleration time 2 Yes A A A
C1-04 Deceleration time 2 Yes A A A
1.5 sec
C1-05 Acceleration time 3 No A A A
C1-06
C1-07
Deceleration time 3
Acceleration time 4
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
5
C1-08 Deceleration time 4 No A A A
C1-10 Acceleration/deceleration time setting unit 1 No A A A
Dwell at start frequency/deceleration time switching
C1-11 0.0 Hz No Q Q Q
frequency

Control Methods
Set Open Closed
Function
Value V/f Loop Loop
Vector Vector
7 Acceleration/Deceleration switch over 1 Yes Yes Yes
1A Acceleration/Deceleration switch over 2 Yes Yes Yes
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Units

Set the acceleration/deceleration time units using C1-10. The factory setting is 1.
Set value Details

0 The acceleration/deceleration time setting range is 0.00 to 6000.0 in units of 0.01 s.
1 The acceleration/deceleration time setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.1 s.
5-17
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal
Commands
When two digital input terminals are set for “Accel./Decel. time switch over 1 and 2” (H1-=7 and 1A), the
acceleration/deceleration times can be switched over even during operation by combining the ON/OFF status
of the terminals.
The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.
Acceleration/Deceleration Acceleration/Deceleration
Acceleration Time Deceleration Time
Time Selection 1 Terminal Time Selection 2 Terminal
OFF OFF C1-01 C1-02
ON OFF C1-03 C1-04
OFF ON C1-05 C1-06
ON ON C1-07 C1-08
Automatic Deceleration Time Switch Over Using a Speed Level

The deceleration times can be switched over automatically at a certain speed which can be set in parameter
C1-11, when S1-26 is set 0.0 Hz.
Fig 5.5 shows the working principle of the function.
Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0 Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0 Hz, the function will be disabled.
Output
Frequency
Accel./Decel. time
Switching Freq.
C1-11
C1-01 C1-02 C1-08
When output frequency ≥ C1-11, deceleration are performed using deceleration Time 1 (C1-02).
When output frequency < C1-11, deceleration are performed using deceleration Time 4 (C1-08).
Fig 5.5 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency
5-18
Acceleration and S-curve Settings

Five different S-curve times are used to reduce the jerk when the speed changes.
Related Parameters
Name
tion Vector Vector
C2-01 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start 0.5 s No Q Q Q
C2-02 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end 0.5 s No Q Q Q
C2-03 S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start 0.5 s No Q Q Q
C2-04 S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end 0.5 s No Q Q Q
C2-05 S-curve characteristic time below leveling 0.5 s No Q Q Q
Fig 5.6 shows the influence of the differnt S-curve timed.
C2-02 C2-03
C2-04
C2-05
C2-01 Leveling Speed
Fig 5.6 S-curve settings 5
Dwell at Start Function

When S1-26 (dwell speed reference) is set and frequency reference is above S1-26, the Dwell at start function
is activated.
When the inverter starts, the inverter accelerates to S1-26 speed with C1-07 acceleration time. Once the motor
speed exceeds the C1-11 frequency, the inverter will use the original acceleration time.
Dwell at start function
Internal RUN
300% torque
Torque comp.at start Latch
level
C1-07 S1-26
Soft Starter
Motor speed C1-11
Brake release
Fig 5.7 Dwell at strart function
5-19
Output Speed Hold (Dwell Function)
The dwell function holds the speed temporarily.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
b6-01 Dwell frequency at start 0.0 Hz No A A A
b6-02 Dwell time at start 0.0 s No A A A
b6-03 Dwell frequency at stop 0.0 Hz No A A A
b6-04 Dwell time at stop 0.0 s No A A A
Applying an Output Speed Dwell

The dwell function at start is applied when the speed level set in parameter b6-01 is reached and is kept for the
time set in parameter b6-02. The dwell function at stop is applied when the speed reaches the level set in
parameter b6-03 and is kept for the time set in parameter b6-04. The setting is shown in Fig 5.8.
Run command ON
OFF
Output frequency
b6-01 b6-03 Time
b6-02 b6-04
Fig 5.8 Output Frequency Dwell Settings
5-20
Stall Prevention During Acceleration

The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if the load is too heavy.
If L3-01 is set to 1 (enabled) and the Inverter output current reaches 85 % of the set value in L3-02, the accel-
eration rate will begin to slow down. When L3-02 is exceeded, the acceleration will stop.
If L3-01 is set to 2 (optimum adjustment), the motor accelerates so that the current is held at the level set in
L3-02. With this setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
L3-01 Stall prevention selection during acceleration 1 No A A No
L3-02 Stall prevention level during acceleration 150%* No A A No
Time Chart
The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.
Output current
Stall level during

L3-02 acceleration
85% of L3-02
5
Time
Output frequency
*1.
*2.
* 1. The acceleration rate is lowered.

* 2. The acceleration is stopped to reduce the output current.
Time
Fig 5.9 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
Setting Precautions
• Set the parameters as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100%.
• Do not increase the stall prevention level unnecessarily. An extremely high setting can reduce the inverter
lifetime. Also do not disable the function.
• If the motor stalls with the factory settings check the V/f pattern settings (E1-) and the motor setup
(E2-).
• If the stall level has to be increased very much to get the elevator running, consider to use a one size bigger
inverter.
5-21
Adjusting Analog Input Signals
Adjusting Analog Frequency References

Using the H3- parameters, the analog input values of terminal A1 or the Channels 1 to 3 of the optional
analog input card AI-14B can be adjusted.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
H3-01 Frequency reference AI-14B CH1signal level selection 0 No A A A
H3-02 Frequency reference AI-14B CH1 input gain 100.0% Yes A A A
H3-03 Frequency referenceAI-14B CH1 input bias 0.0% Yes A A A
H3-04 AI-14B CH3 signal level selection 0 No A A A
H3-05 AI-14B CH3 function selection 2 No A A A
H3-06 AI-14B CH3 input gain 100.0% Yes A A A
H3-07 AI-14B CH3 input bias 0.0% Yes A A A
H3-08 AI-14B CH2 signal level selection 3 No A A A
H3-09 AI-14B CH2 function selection 0 No A A A
H3-10 AI-14B CH2 input gain 100.0% Yes A A A
H3-11 AI-14B CH2 input bias 0.0% Yes A A A
H3-12 Analog input filter time constant for the AI-14B 0.03 s No A A A
H3-15 Terminal A1 function selection 0 No No No A
H3-16 Terminal A1 input gain 100.0% Yes A A A
H3-17 Terminal A1 input bias 0.0% Yes A A A
Adjusting Analog Input Signals

The frequency reference can be input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage. The voltage
level at terminal A1 is 0 to +10V. The analog input channels of the AI-14B option card can be used with 0 to
+10V or -10 to +10V.
The input signal levels can be selected using,
• H3-01 for AI-14B CH1
The signals can be adjustments to the signals can be made using:

• H3-02 (Gain) and H3-03 (Bias) for Channel 1 of the AI-14B option card
• H3-16 (Gain) and H3-17 (Bias) for analog input A1
The gain sets the level of the selected input value if 10V are input, the bias sets the level of the selected input
value if 0V is input.
5-22
Speed Detection and Speed Limitation
Speed Agreement Function

There are eight different types of frequency detection methods available. The digital outputs M1 to M6 can be
programmed for this function and can be used to indicate a frequency detection or agreement to any external
equipment.
Related Parameters
Name
tion Vector Vector
L4-01 Speed agreement detection level 0.0 Hz No A A A
L4-02 Speed agreement detection width 2.0 Hz No A A A
L4-03 Speed agreement detection level (±) 0.0 Hz No A A A
L4-04 Speed agreement detection width (±) 2.0 Hz No A A A
Multifunction Output Settings: H2-01 to H2-03 (M1 – M6 function selection)

The table below shows the necessary H2-01 to H2-03 parameter setting for each of the speed agreement func-
tions. Refer to the timing charts on the following page for details.
fref/fout Agree 1
Function Setting
2
5
fout/fset Agree 1 3
Frequency detection 1 4
fref/fout Agree 2 13
fout/fset Agree 2 14
Setting Precautions
• With L4-01 an absolute speed agreement level is set, i.e. a speed agreement is detected in both directions
(Up and Down).
• With L4-03 a signed speed agreement level is set, i.e. a speed agreement is detected only in the set direc-
tion (positive level → Up direction, negative level → Down direction).
5-23
Time Charts
The following table shows the time charts for each of the speed agreement functions.
Related L4-01: Speed Agree Level L4-03: Speed Agree Level +/–
parameter L4-02: Speed Agree Width L4-04: Speed Agree Width
fref/fout Agree 1 fref/fout Agree 2
Frequency Frequency
reference reference
Output L4-02 Output L4-04

frequency or frequency or
fref/fout motor speed motor speed
Agree
L4-02 L4-04
fref/fout Agree 1 OFF ON fref/fout Agree 2 OF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 2) (Multi-function output setting = 13)
fout/fset Agree 1 fout/fset Agree 2

(ON at the following conditions during frequency agree) (ON at the following conditions during frequency agree)
L4-02 L4-04
L4-01 L4-03
Output fre- Output fre-
fout/fset quency or quency or
motor speed motor speed
Agree L4-01
L4-02
OFF ON OFF ON
fout/fset Agree 1 fout/fset Agree 2
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1 Frequency (FOUT) Detection 3

(L4-01 > | Output frequency |) (L4-03 > Output frequency)
L4-02 L4-04
L4-01 L4-03
quency or quency or
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 1 ON OFF Freq. Detection 3 ON OFF

Frequency
Detection Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2 Frequency Detection 4
(L4-01 < | Output frequency |) (L4-03 < Output frequency)
L4-02 L4-04
L4-01 L4-03
quency or quency or
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 2 OFF ON Freq. Detection 4 OFF ON

5-24
Limiting the Elevator Speed

To use the high speed limit of UP direction or DOWN direction , one of the digital inputs must be set for “
High speed limit switch Up” or “Down” (H1- = 87/88).
Multifunction Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Control Methods
Open Closed
Set Value Function
V/f Loop Loop
Vector Vector
87 High speed limit switch (Up direction) Yes Yes Yes
88 High speed limit switch (Down direction) Yes Yes Yes
High speed limit switch Up

The high speed limit switch UP function is to limit the speed to the leveling speed when the UP direction (For-
ward) signal is given. The DOWN direction has no speed limit.
High speed limit swith Down

The high speed limit switch DOWN function is to limit the speed to the leveling speed when the DOWN
direction (Reverse) signal is given , the UP direction has no speed limit.
5-25
Improving the Operation Performance
Reducing the Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function)

When the load is large, the motor slip also grows and the motor speed decreases. The slip compensation func-
tion keeps the motor speed constant, regardless of changes in load. When the motor is operating at the rated
load, parameter E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) × the slip compensation gain value in parameter C3-01 is added to
the output frequency. The function can be used in V/f control or Open Loop Vector control.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
C3-01 Slip compensation gain 1.0 Yes A A No
C3-02 Slip compensation delay time 2000 ms No A A No
C3-03 Slip compensation limit 200% No A A No
C3-04 Slip compensation during regeneration 0 No A A No
C3-05 Output voltage limit operation selection 0 No No A A
Adjusting Slip Compensation Gain (C3-01)

The set value of C3-01 depends on the control method. The factory settings are:
• Open Loop Vector control: 1.0
• Closed Loop Vector control: 1.0
Set C3-01 to 1.0 to compensate the slip depending on the actual torque output status using the rated slip
(E2-02) as reference.
Adjust the slip compensation gain using the following procedure.
1. With Open Loop Vector control set E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) and E2-03 (Motor No-load Current). The
motor rated slip can be calculated using the values on the motor nameplate and the following formula:
Rated motor speed (rpm) × Number of motor poles

Motor rated slip (Hz) = Motor rated frequency (Hz) ∠ ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
120
The motor data can be set automatically using the autotuning function.
2. With V/f control set C3-01 to 1.0.
3. Apply a load and compare the speed reference and the actual motor speed during run with constant speed.
Adjust the slip compensation gain by 0.1 at a time. If the speed is less than the target value, increase the
slip compensation gain, and if the speed is higher than the target value, reduce the slip compensation gain.
4. Setting C3-01 to 0.0 disables the slip compensation function.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant (C3-02)

The slip compensation delay time constant is set in ms. The setting value of C3-02 is 2000ms. Normally, there
is no need to change these settings. When the slip compensation response is low, lower the set value. When the
speed is unstable, increase the set value.
5-26
Adjusting Slip Compensation Limit (C3-03)

Using parameter C3-03 the upper limit for the slip compensation can be set as a percentage, taking the motor
rated slip as 100%.
If the speed is lower than the target value but does not change even after adjusting the slip compensation gain,
the slip compensation limit may have been reached. Increase the limit, and check the speed again. Always
make sure that the value of the slip compensation limit and reference frequency does not exceed the tolerance
of the machine.
The following diagram shows the slip compensation limit for the constant torque range and fixed output range.
Slip compensation limit
Output frequency
E1-06: Base frequency

E1-04: Maximum output frequency
Fig 5.10 Slip Compensation Limit
Selecting Slip Compensation Function During Regeneration (C3-04)

Enables or disables the slip compensation function during regeneration. The factory setting is enabled.
Operation Selection when Output Voltage Saturated (C3-05) 5

Generally the Inverter cannot output a voltage that is higher than the input voltage. If the output voltage refer-
ence for the motor (monitor parameter U1-06) exceeds the input voltage in the high-speed range, the output
voltage becomes saturated, and inverter cannot respond to speed or load changes. This function automatically
reduces the output voltage to avoid voltage saturation.
Thereby the speed control accuracy can be maintained even at high speeds (around the rated speed of the
motor). By the lowered voltage the current can be around 10% higher compared to the operation without volt-
age limiter.
Torque Compensation Function Adjustments

The torque compensation function detects a rising motor load, and increases the output torque.
In V/f control the inverter calculates the motor primary loss voltage using the terminal resistance value
(E2-05) and adjusts the output voltage (V) to compensate insufficient torque at startup and during low-speed
operation.
The compensation voltage is calculated by the calculated Motor primary voltage loss × parameter C4-01.
In Open Loop Vector control the motor excitation current and the torque producing current are calculated and
controled separately. The torque compensation affects the torque producing current only.
The torque producing current is calculated by the calculated torque reference × C4-01.
5-27
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
C4-01 Torque compensation gain 1.00 Yes A A No
C4-02 Torque compensation delay time constant 2000 ms No A A No
C4-03 Starting torque compensation value (forward direction) 0.0 No No A No
C4-04 Starting torque compensation value (reverse direction) 0.0 No No A No
C4-05 Starting torque compensation time constant 1 ms No No A No
Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01)

Normally, there is no need to change this setting. If adjustments are necessary do the following:
Open Loop Vector control

• If the torque response is slow increase the setting value.
• If vibrations occur decrease the setting value.
V/f control
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
• If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity (max. applicable motor capacity), increase the
set value.
• If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Setting precautions
• Adjust this parameter so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter
rated output current range.
• Adjust the value in steps of 0.05 only.
Adjusting the Torque Compensation Delay Time Constant (C4-02)

The factory setting depends on the control mode. The factory settings are:
• V/f control: 200 ms
• Open loop vector control: 20 ms
Normally, there is no need to change this setting. If adjustments are necessary do the following:
• If the motor is vibrating or if overshooting occurs, increase the set value.
• If the torque response is slow, decrease the set value.
5-28
Starting Torque Compensation Function (C4-03 to C4-05)

A starting torque compensation can be applied to speed up the torque establishment at start in Open Loop Vec-
tor control.
It works like shown in the following diagram.
Forward (Reverse) Run command
ON
OFF
Time constant: C4-02

Time constant: C4-05
C4-03 (forward)
C4-04 (reverse, negative polarity)
Torque compensation
volume
C4-05 x 4
E1-09
Output frequency E1-09
Fig 5.11 Time Chart for Starting Torque Frequency
When this function is used, the following should be considered:

• Both values, C4-03 and C4-04 have to be set.
• The compensation works for motoring operation only. It can not be used for regenerative operation.
• If the starting torque compensation is used and a large shock is generated at the start, increase the starting
torque compensation time constant (C4-05)
• The function can be not be used unrestricted for elevators, since the load is not know before the start.
Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) (Closed Loop Vector only)

5
In Closed Loop Vector control the autmatic speed regulator (ASR) adjusts the torque reference in order to
eliminate the deviation between the speed reference and the measured speed (PG feedback).Fig 5.1 shows the
ASR structure.
C5-01/03/09
Frequency + + Delay
P Torque
Reference - Timer Reference
+
C5-06
I Torque
Motor Limits
Speed C5-02/04/10 C5-08
I-Limit
Fig 5.1 ASR Structure Block Diagram
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
C5-01 ASR proportional (P) gain 1 40.00 Yes No No A
C5-02 ASR integral (I) time 1 0.500 s Yes No No A
C5-06 ASR delay time 0.004 s No No No A
C5-08 ASR integral limit 400 % No No No A
5-29
ASR Gain and Integral Time Adjustments
There are three sets of ASR gain and bias, one for the maximum speed (C5-01/02), one the minimum speed
for acceleration (C5-03/04) and one for the minmum speed for deceleration (C5-09/10) (see the figure below).
ASR P,I ASR P,I
C5-01 ASR Gain 1 C5-09 ASR Gain 3

C5-02 ASR I Time 1 C5-10 ASR I Time 3
C5-03 ASR Gain2

C5-03 ASR Gain2
C5-04 ASR I time 2
C5-04 ASR I time 2
0Hz C5-07 E1-04 0Hz C5-07 E1-04

Speed(Hz) Speed(Hz)
During Acceleration During Deceleration
Adjusting ASR Proportional Gains (C5-01/03/09)

This gain adjusts the responsiveness of the speed control (ASR). The responsiveness of the ASR is increased
when this setting is increased. Oscillation will occur if this setting is increased too much.
• Increase C5-01 if the ASR is too slow at start or very low frequencies, decrease it if vibrations occur.
• Increase C5-03 if the ASR is too slow at high speed or if overshooting occurs at speed changes in the high
speed area, decrease it if vibrations occur
• Increase C5-09 if ASR is slow in the low speed area or if undershooting occurs at leveling speed. If vibra-
tions occur in the low speed area during deceleration decrease the value.
Adjusting ASR Integral Times (C5-02/04/10)

This parameter sets the speed control (ASR) integral time. Lengthening the integral time lowers the respon-
siveness and the speed accuracy when the load changes suddenly. Oscillation and overshooting can occur if
this setting value is too low.
• Decrease C5-02 if a speed deviation is compensated too slow at start or at very low frequencies, increase it
if vibrations occur.
• Decrease C5-04 if a speed deviation is compensated too slow at high speeds or if overshooting occurs at
speed changes in the high speed area, increase it if vibrations occur.
• Decrease C5-10 if a speed deviation is compensated too slow in the low speed area or if undershooting
occurs at leveling speed. If vibrations occur in the low speed area during deceleration increase the value.
5-30
Stabilizing Speed (Automatic Frequency Regulator) (Open Loop Vector)

The speed feedback detection control (AFR) function controls the stability of the speed when a load is sud-
denly applied or removed. It calculates the amount of speed fluctuation using the torque current (Iq) feedback
value and compensates the output frequency with the amount of fluctuation.
fref fout
Iq
Fig 5.12 AFR Control Loop
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
N2-01 Speed feedback detection control (AFR) gain 1.00 No No A No
N2-02 Speed feedback detection control (AFR) time constant 50 ms No No A No
Setting the AFR Gain (N2-01) 5

Normally there is no need to change this setting. If adjustments are necessary do the following:
If hunting occurs increase N2-01.
If the response is too low, decrease N2-01.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a time while checking the response.
Inertia Compensation (Closed Loop Vector Only)

The Feed Forward Control is used to eliminate the speed overshoot or undershoot.
The function can be enabled using parameter n5-01.
Related Parameters
Change Open Closed
Parameter Factory
Name during oper- V/f Loop Loop
No. setting
ation Vector Vector
n5-01 Feed forward control selection 0:disabled No No No A
n5-02 Motor acceleration time kVA dependent No No No A
n5-03 Feed forward proportional gain 1.0 No No No A
5-31
Adjustments
Motor acceleration time (n5-02)

The motor acceleration time n5-02 the time which is needed to accelerate to rated speed with the rated torque
of the motor. The time can be estimated like follows:
• Make the general setup (V/f pattern, Motor Setup, etc.)
• Balance the elevator (car in middle position, Car weight = Counter weight)
• Set the torque limits to 100% using the L7- parameters.
• Set the acceleration time very short (the inverter must reach the torque limit very fast).
• Start in any direction and measure the time from zero speed to top speed.
• Set this time in n5-02.
Feed Forward Gain (n5-03)

This value usually has not to be changed.
• Increase the time to improve the response to the speed reference
• Decrease the time if vibrations occur
Improving the Leveling Accuracy by Slip compensation

This function can be used in V/f and Open Loop Vector control to compensate the motor slip influence at low
speed under different load conditions. Thereby the leveling accuracy can be improved.
The inverter measures the current level or torque reference 1.0 sec after speed-agree condition (acceleration
finished) for 0.5 sec and calculates the average value to estimate the load. This value is used for the calculation
of slip which is added to the speed reference at leveling speed (see Fig 5.13).
measure
apply
Fig 5.13 Slip Compensation Working Principle
Related Parameters
Change Open Closed
Parameter Factory
Name during V/f Loop Loop
No. setting
operation Vector Vector
S2-01 Motor Rated rpm 1380rpm No A No No
S2-02 Slip Compensation Gain at Motoring 0.7 No A A No
S2-03 Slip Compensation Gain at Regenerating 1.0 No A A No
S2-07 Slip Compensation primary Delay Time 200ms No No A No
5-32
Adjustments
The Slip compensation values can be set separately for motoring and regenerative operation. Before adjusting
this function the general setup should have been done (Motor Setup, V/f pattern, Speeds, ASR settings etc.).
To adjust the Slip compesation function do the following in motoring and regenerative mode:
• Set the motor speed in S2-01 if V/f control is used.
• Try to measure the actual motor speed during leveling.
• If the motor speed is lower than the leveling speed reference increase S2-02 in motoring mode or decrease
S2-03 in regenerative mode.
• If the motor speed is higher than the leveling speed reference decrease S2-02 in motoring mode or increase
S2-03 in regenerative mode.
Field Forcing
The field forcing function controls the motor flux and compensates the flux establishment delay of the motor.
Thereby it improves the motor responsiveness on changes in the speed reference or the load.
Field forcing is applied during all operation conditions except DC Injection.
Using parameter d6-06 a field forcing limit can be applied. A setting of 100% is equal to the no-load current
set in parameter E2-03.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Parameter
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
during
Operation
V/f
Open Closed
Loop Loop
Vector Vector
5
d6-03 Field forcing selection 0 No No No A
d6-06 Field forcing limit 400% No No A A
Adjusting DC injection current level

When Open Loop Vector control mode is used, the DC injection current level at stop for motoring and regen-
erative operation can be adjusted individually. The motor condition (Regenerative or motoring) is detected
when the inverter is running at another speed than leveling speed.
The function can be used to improve the stoping behavior.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
S1-17 DC injection current regenerative 100 % No No A No
S1-18 DC injection current motoring 20 % No No A No
5-33
Protective Functions
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation

Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the inverter out-
put frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.
Stall prevention during operation can be enabled in V/f control only. If the Inverter output current continues to
exceed the setting in parameter L3-06 for 100 ms or longer, the motor speed is reduced. Enable or disable the
stall prevention using parameter L3-05. Set the according deceleration times using C1-02 (Deceleration time
1) or C1-04 (Deceleration Time 2).
If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3-06 – 2%, the motor will accelerate again to the set fre-
quency.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
Stall prevention selection during running function
L3-05 1 No A No No
selection
L3-06 Stall prevention level during running 150% No A No No
Precautions
If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity or the motor stalls when operating at the factory set-
tings, lower the stall prevention level during operation.
Setting Precautions
• Set the parameters as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100%.
• Do not increase the stall prevention level unnecessarily. An extremely high setting can reduce the inverter
lifetime. Also do not disable the function.
• If the motor stalls with the factory settings check the V/f pattern (E1-) and the motor setup (E2-).
• If the stall level has to be increased very much to get the elevator running check the mechanical system or
consider to use a one size bigger inverter.
Motor Torque Detection / Stacked Car Detection

The inverter provides a torque detection function to detect overtorque or undertorque. An alarm signal can be
output to the digital output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, or M5-M6.
To use the overtorque/undertorque detection function, set B, 17, 18, 19 (overtorque/undertorque detection
NO/NC) in one of the parameter H2-01 to H2-03 (digital output terminals M1 to M6 function selection).
Overtorque/undertorque is detected by:
• observing the output current in V/f control (the inverter rated output current is equal to 100%).
• observing the torque reference value in Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control (the motor rated torque
is equal to 100%).
5-34
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
L6-01 Torque detection selection 1 2 No A A A
L6-02 Torque detection level 1 150% No A A A
L6-03 Torque detection time 1 10.0 s No A A A
L6-04 Torque detection selection 2 0 No A A A
L6-05 Torque detection level 2 150% No A A A
L6-06 Torque detection time 2 0.1 s No A A A
Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-03)

Control Methods
Set Open Close
Function
Value V/f Loop d Loop
Vector Vector
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO
B Yes Yes Yes
(NO contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC
17 Yes Yes Yes
(NC contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO
18 Yes Yes Yes
(NO contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC
19 Yes Yes Yes
(NC contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF)
L6-01 and L6-04 Set Values and Operator Display (JVOP-160 only) 5
The relationship between alarms displayed on the digital operator when overtorque or undertorque is detected,
and the set values in L6-01 and L6-04, is shown in the following table.
Operator Display
Set Overtorque/ Overtorque/
Function
Value Undertorque Undertorque
Detection 1 Detection 2
0 Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled. – –
1 Overtorque detection only with speed agree; operation continues (warning is output). OL3 flashes OL4 flashes
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues (warning is
2 OL3 flashes OL4 flashes
output).
3 Overtorque detection only with speed agree; output is stopped upon detection. OL3 lights up OL4 lights up
4 Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output is stopped upon detection. OL3 lights up OL4 lights up
5 Undertorque detection only with speed agree; operation continues (warning is output). UL3 flashes UL4 flashes
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues (warning is
6 UL3 flashes UL4 flashes
output).
7 Undertorque detection only with speed matching; output is stopped upon detection. UL3 lights up UL4 lights up
8 Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output is stopped upon detection. UL3 lights up UL4 lights up
5-35
Timing Charts
Fig 5.14 and Fig 5.15 show the timing charts for overtorque and undertorque detection.
Motor current (output torque)
L6-02 or L6-05
L6-03 or L6-03 or
Overtorque detection 1 NO L6-06
L6-06
or overtorque detection 2 NO
*Overtorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output current
(or motor rated torque).
Fig 5.14 Overtorque Detection

Motor current (output torque)
L6-02 or L6-05
L6-03 or L6-03 or
Undertorque detection 1 NO L6-06
L6-06
or ondertorque detection 2 NO
*Undertorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output
current (or motor rated torque).
Fig 5.15 Undertorque Detection
Car Stuck Detection (OL3, Using Overtorque detection)

The Overtorque detection function can be used to detect a stucked car. The torque detection function 1 can be
used for this. Therefore a digital output has to be programmed for “Overtorque detection 1” (H2- = B or
17). Using this with the factory setting car stuck is detected (output is switched) torque/current is higher than
150% for 10 sec. The level can be adjusted in L6-02, the time in L6-03. The output is switched of and an OL3
fault will be indicated (see .Fig 5.16)
DC Injection/
zero servo
speed
Inverter enable (D/I)
Up/Down (D/I)
Selected Speed (D/I)
Fault
Torque is higher
than L6-02
detect. time
L6-03
Fig 5.16 Car Stuck fault detection
5-36
Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function)

This function allows limitation of motor shaft torque independendly for each of the four quadrants. The torque
limit can be set as fixed value using parameters or as variable value using an analog input. The torque limit
function can be used with Open Loop Vector and Closed Loop Vector control only.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change dur-
Parameter Factory Set- Open Closed
Name ing Opera-
No. ting V/f Loop Loop
tion
Vector Vector
L7-01 Forward drive torque limit 200%* No No A A
L7-02 Reverse drive torque limit 200%* No No A A
L7-03 Forward regenerative torque limit 200%* No No A A
L7-04 Reverse regenerative torque limit 200%* No No A A

L7-06 Torque limit time constant 200 ms No No A No
L7-07 Torque limit operation during accel./decel. 0 No No A No
* A setting value of 100% is equal to the motor rated torque.
Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-03)

Control Methods
5
Set Open Closed
Function
Value V/f Loop Loop
Vector Vector
30 During torque limit No Yes Yes
Setting the Torque Limit Using Parameters

Using L7-01 to L7-04, four torque limits in the following directions can be set individually: Forward drive,
reverse drive, forward regenerative and reverse regenerative (see Fig 5.17)
Output Torque
L7-01
L7-04
Forward
Reverse Drive
Regenerative
Output Speed
Forward
Reverse
Regenerative
Drive
L7-03
L7-02
Fig 5.17 Torque Limit Paremeters
Using a Digital Output to Signalize Operation at the Torque Limit

If a multifunction output is set for this function (H2-01 to H2-03 is set to “30”), the output is switched ON
when the motor output torque reaches one of the torque limits.
5-37
Enabling Integral Torque Limit Operation (L7-06 and L7-07)
In Open Loop Vector control an integral operation can be applied to the torque limit function (P-control is
standard). This improves the torque limit responsiveness and smoothes the torque limit operation. To enable
the integral operation set paramter L7-07 to 1. The integral time constant can be set in parameter L7-06.
Setting Precautions
• When the output torque reaches the torque limit, control and compensation of the motor speed is disabled
to prevent the output torque from exceeding the torque limit. The torque limit has the priority.
• The torque limit accuracy is ±5% at an output frequency of 10 Hz or above. When output frequency is
lower than 10 Hz, the accuracy is lowered.
Motor Overload Protection

The motor can be protected from overload using the built-in electronic thermal overload relay function.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
E2-01 Motor rated current 1.90 A * No Q Q Q
L1-01 Motor protection selection 1 No Q Q Q
L1-02 Motor protection time constant 1.0 min No A A A
* Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter with 0.4 kW.)
Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)

Control Methods
Set Open Closed
Function
Value V/f Loop Loop
Vector Vector
1F Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level) Yes Yes Yes
Setting Motor Rated Current (E2-01)

Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in parameters E2-01 (for motor 1). This set value is the
base current for the internal thermal overload calculation.
Setting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics (L1-01)

Set the overload protection function in L1-01 according to the used motor.
The induction motor's cooling abilities vary with the motor type. Consequently, you must select the electronic
thermal protection characteristics.
Set L1-01 to:
0: to disable the thermal motor protection function.
1: to enable the thermal motor protection for a fan cooled general purpose motor (self-cooled).
2: to enable the thermal motor protection for an inverter motor (externally cooled).
3: to enable the thermal motor protection for a special vector motor (exernally cooled).
5-38
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time (L1-02)

The motor protection operation time is the time for that the motor can handle a 150% overload when it was
running with the rated load before (i.e. operating temperature was reached before applying the 150% over-
load). Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02. The factory setting is 60 sec.
Fig 5.18 shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation time (L1-02 =
1.0 min., operation at 50 Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)
Operating time (min.)
Cold start
Hot start
Motor current (%)

E2-01 is set to 100%
Fig 5.18 Motor Protection Operation Time
Setting a Motor Overload Pre-Alarm

If the motor overload protection function is enabled (i.e., L1-01 is set to a value different from 0) and H2-01 is
set to H2-03 (output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 function selection) to 1F (motor overload OL1
pre-alarm), the motor overload pre-alarm will be output. If the electronic thermal value reaches minimum 90%
of the overload detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.
5
Output Current Observation
The inverter can observe the output current and thereby detect if something is wrong in the sequence or with
the motor connection. There are two observer functions, one for the start and one during run.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
S1-14 SE2 detection time 200 ms No A A A
S1-15 SE3 detection time 200 ms No A A A
SE2 fault (SE2, Current observation at start)

At the brake open delay time (S1-06) + S1-14 after the Up/Down command was given, the output current is
measured. If it is below 25% of the motor no-load current (E2-03) a SE2 fault will be output.
SE3 fault (SE3, Current observation during Run)

From the time S1-15 after the Up/Down command was given, the inverter starts to observe the output current
continously. If it falls below 25% of the motor no-load current (E2-03) a SE3 will be output.
5-39
Inverter Protection
Inverter Overheat Protection

The Inverter is protected against overheating using a thermistor that detects the heatsink temperature.
When the overheat temperature level is reached the inverter output is switched off.
To prevent a suddenly and unexpected stop of the inverter due to an overtemperature, an overheating
pre-alarm can be output. The temperature level for that pre-alarm can be set in parameter L8-02. Using
parameter L8-03 the inverter operation when an overtemperature occurs can be selected.
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the heatsink temper-
ature exceeds the overheat pre-alarm level set in L8-02.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level 75°C * No A A A
L8-03 Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm operation selection 3 No A A A
* The factory setting depends on the inverter capacity.
Multifunction Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)

Control Methods
Open Closed
Set Value Function
V/f Loop Loop
Vector Vector
20 Inverter overheat (OH) Yes Yes Yes
Input Open Phase Protection

This function detects an open input phase by observing the DC bus ripple level.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
L8-05 Input open-phase protection selection 1 No A A A
The factory setting is enabled. It is not recommended to disable this function.
5-40
Inverter Protection
Output Open Phase Protection

This function detects an open output phase by comparing the output current value of each phase with an inter-
nal set output open phase detection level (5% of inverter rated current). The detection will not work when the
output frequency is below 2% of the base frequency.
Three settings are available:
• L8-07=0, no output open phase detection
• L8-07=1, the loss of one phase is detected only
• L8-07=2, the loss of 2 or 3 phases is detected as well
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
L8-07 Output open-phase protection selection 2 No A A A
Ground Fault Protection

This function detects the earth leakage current by calculating the sum of the three output currents. Normally it
should be 0. If the earth leakage current gets too high, the inverter output will be switched off and a GF fault
is shown on the display. The fault contact is activated. 5
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
L8-09 Ground protection selection 1 No A A A
Precautions
• It is not recommended to disable this function.
• A Ground Fault can also be detected if contactors at the inverter output are opened when the output is still
active. Therefore, to prevent false Ground Fault detection checks the sequence and make sure that the
ouput is switched off or base blocked before opening output contactors.
5-41
Cooling Fan Control
This function controls the fan which is mounted to the inverters heatsink.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
L8-10 Cooling fan control selection 0 No A A A
L8-11 Cooling fan control delay time 60 s No A A A
Selecting the Cooling Fan Control

Using parameter L8-10 two modes can be selected:
0: The fan is ON only when the inverter output is ON, i.e. a voltage is output. This is the factory setting. The
turn OFF delay time for the fan can be set in parameter L8-11. After a stop command the inverter waits for
this time before switching OFF the cooling fan. The factory setting is 60 sec.
1: The fan is ON whenever the inverter power supply is switched ON.
Setting the Ambient Temperature
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
L8-12 Ambient Temperature 45° C No A A A
At high ambient temperatures an output current derating has to be considered. The derating depends on the
ambient temperture. The derating curve is shown in Fig 5.19. To ensure a safe inverter protection at high
ambient temperatures, always set parameter L8-15 to the actual ambient temperature.
10 0
Output Current in % of the
80
Rated Current
60
40
20
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Tem perature (°C)
Fig 5.19 Ambient Temperature Derating Curve
5-42
Input Terminal Functions

The digital multifunction inputs can be set for several functions using the H1-01 to H1-05 parameters (termi-
nal S3 to S7 function selection). These following section describes the input functions not mentioned in any
other section.
Related Parameters
Name
tion Vector Vector
H1-01 Terminal S3 function selection 24 No A A A
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Hardware Baseblock)

Using a baseblock command the inverter output can be cut immediately. When baseblock is activated the
power supply of the IGBT driver circuit is cut off. In this case the motor will start coasting. If the baseblock
command is cleared, the inverter output operation is resumed.
To use the baseblock function one of the digital input S8 must be used. The input is a NC input, i.e. if terminal
S8 is open, the inverter is baseblocked. 5
Stopping the Inverter on External Device Errors (External Error Function)
The external error function activates the error contact output and stops the Inverter operation. Using this func-
tion the inverter operation can be stopped on peripheral devices break down or other errors. The digital opera-
tor will display EFx (External error [input terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the number of the terminal at
which the external error signal is input. For example, if an external error signal is input to terminal S3, EF3
will be displayed.
To use the external error function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (dig-
ital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection).
Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-05 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.
• Signal input level from peripheral devices
• External error detection method
• Operation after external error detection
5-43
The following table shows the relationship between the external fault conditions and the set value in H1-.
Input Level Error Detection Method

Operation During Error Detection
(See Note 1.) (See Note 2.)
Set
Detection Continue
Value Constant Decelerate to Coast to Stop Emergency
NO Contact NC Contact During Oper- Operation
Detection Stop (Error) (Error) Stop (Error)
ation (Warning)
20 Yes Yes Yes
21 Yes Yes Yes
22 Yes Yes Yes
23 Yes Yes Yes
24 Yes Yes Yes
25 Yes Yes Yes
26 Yes Yes Yes
27 Yes Yes Yes
28 Yes Yes Yes
29 Yes Yes Yes
2A Yes Yes Yes
2B Yes Yes Yes
2C Yes Yes Yes
2D Yes Yes Yes
2E Yes Yes Yes
2F Yes Yes Yes
1. Sets the input level at which errors are detected. (NO contact: External error when ON; NC contact: External error when OFF).
2. Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation.
Constant detection: Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter.
Detection during operation: Detects only during Inverter operation.
Using the Timer Function

The multi-function digital input terminals S3 to S7 can be used as timer function input terminals, and
multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 can be used as timer function output terminals.
By setting the delay time, you can prevent chattering of the sensors and switches.
• Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7) to 18 (timer function input).
• Set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 function selection) to
12 (timer function output).
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
b4-01 Timer function ON-delay time 0.0 s No A A A
b4-02 Timer function OFF-delay time 0.0 s No A A A
5-44

Control Methods
Set Open Closed
Function
Value V/f Loop Loop
Vector Vector
18 Timer function input Yes Yes Yes
Multifunction Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)

Control Methods
Set Open Closed
Function
Value V/f Loop Loop
Vector Vector
12 Timer function output Yes Yes Yes
Setting Example
When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set in b4-01, the timer output function is
turned ON. When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set in b4-02, the timer output
function is turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram.
Timer function input
Timer function output

5
Fig 5.20 Timer Function Operation Example
5-45
Output Contactor Answer Back Detetcion
The output contactors can be observed using the output contactor answer back function. Therefore an auxil-
liary contact of the motor contactors must be connected to a digital input which is set to for this function
(H1-=86). If no answer back signal comes from the contactor, the inverter detects a SE1 fault (see below).

Control Methods
Set Open Closed
Function
Value V/f Loop Loop ´
Vector Vector
86 Output contactor answer back Yes Yes Yes
SE1 fault (SE1:Contactor Feed-back Faults)

There are 3 possibilities of fault condition
Case 1: Output contactor of output inverter kept closing before contactor closed command set.
Case 2: Output contactor cannot be closed within the contactor close delay time.
Case 3 :Output contactor is opened during inverter running.
Contactor Faults DC Injection/

Run Delay zero servo
Speed
Up/Down
Speed selection
Inverter enable(D/I)
Contactor Control(D/O)
Contactor comformation Case 1

5-46
Output Terminal Functions

The digital multifunction outputs can be set for several functions using the H2-01 to H2-03 parameters (termi-
nal M1 to M6 function selection). These functions are described in the following section.
Related Parameters
Name
tion Vector Vector
H2-01 Terminal M1-M2 function selection 0 No A A A
During Run (Setting: 0) and During Run 2 (Setting: 37)
During Run (Setting: 0)

OFF The Run command is OFF and there is not output voltage.
ON The Run command is ON or a voltage is being output.
During Run 2 (Setting: 37)

OFF The inverter is not outputting a frequency. (Baseblock, DC injection braking or stopped)
ON The inverter is outputting a frequency.
These outputs can be used to indicate the inverter’s operating status. 5

Run command OFF ON
Baseblock command OFF ON
Output frequency
During run 1 output OFF ON
During run 2 output OFF ON
Fig 5.21 Timing Chart for “During RUN” Output
Zero Speed (Setting: 1)
Output frequency Zero speed level (b2-01)
Zero-speed output OFF ON
Fig 5.22 Timing Chart for Zero-speed
OFF The output frequency is higher than the zero speed level (b2-01).
ON The output frequency is lower than the zero speed level (b2-01).
5-47
Inverter Operation Ready (Setting: 6)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output will be switched ON when the initialisa-
tion of the inverter at startup has finished without any faults.
During DC Bus Undervoltage (Setting: 7)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON as long as a DC bus und-
ervoltage is detected.
During Baseblock (Setting: 8)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON as long as the inverter out-
put is base blocked.
Frequency Reference Source Selection (Setting: 9)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is ON when the digital operator is selected
as frequency reference source. If any other frequency reference is selected the output is switched OFF.
Run Command Selection Status (Setting: A)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the digital operator
is selected as RUN command source. If any other RUN command source is selected output is switched OFF.
Fault Output (Setting: E)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when any fault different
from CPF00 and CPF01 occurs. The output is also not switched at minor faults. (Refer to page 6-2 pp. for a
fault list.)
Minor Fault Output (Setting: 10)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when a minor fault occurs
(refer to page 6-9 pp. for an alarm list).
Fault Reset Command Active (Setting: 11)

If a multifunction output is set for this function the output is switched ON as long as a fault reset command is
input at one of the digital inputs.
During Reverse Run (Setting: 1A)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON whenever a RUN com-
mand in reverse direction is active. The contact will also be ON during DC injection, Braking and Base
Block. It will not work when a forward RUN command is input.
During Base Block 2 (Setting: 1B)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched OFF as long as a Baseblock
command is input at terminal S8
5-48
During Regenerative Operation (Setting: 1D)

If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the motor works
regenerative, i.e. when energy is feedback to the inverter.
Speed Detection at decelerattion (Door Zone) (Setting:42)

This output can be used to detect, that the car is in the door zone. The detection is speed dependent.
V/f control and Open Loop Vector control Closed Loop Vector control
The output frequency is lower than S1-27 during The motor speed is lower than S1-27 during decelera-
OFF
deceleration tion
The output frequency is higher than S1-27 during The motor speed is higher than S1-27 during deceler-
ON
deceleration ation
If the Up/Down command is released, this output is switched OFF.
Not Zero Speed (Setting:43)

This function can be used for indicating the reverse condition of Zero speed status.
OFF The output frequency is lower than the zero speed level (b2-01).
ON The output frequency is higher than the zero speed level (b2-01).
5-49
Motor and V/f Pattern Setup
Setting Motor Parameters

In vector control method, the motor parameters are set automatically during autotuning (refer to page 3-12,
Autotuning Mode. If autotuning does not complete normally, set them manually.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
E2-01 Motor rated current 14.00 A * No Q Q Q
E2-02 Motor rated slip 2.73 Hz * No A A A
E2-03 Motor no-load current 4.50 A * No A A A
E2-04 Number of motor poles (Number of poles) 4 poles No No Q Q
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance 0.771 Ω * No A A A
E2-06 Motor leak inductance 19.6 % No No A A
E2-07 Motor iron saturation coefficient 1 0.50 No No A A
E2-10 Motor iron loss for torque compensation 112 W * No A No No
E2-11 Motor rated output power 3.700 * No Q Q Q
Note All factory-set parameters are for a Yaskawa standard 4-pole motor.
* The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 400 V Class Inverter for 3.7 kW).
Manual Setting of the Motor Parameters
Motor Rated Current Setting (E2-01)

Set E2-01 to the rated current value on the motor nameplate.
Motor Rated Slip Setting (E2-02)

Set E2-02 to the motor rated slip calculated from the number of rated rotations on the motor nameplate.
Rated speed (rpm) x No. of motor poles
Motor rated slip = Motor rated frequency (Hz) –
120
Motor No-Load Current Setting (E2-03)

Set E2-03 to the motor no-load current at the rated voltage and rated frequency. Normally, the motor no-load
current is not written on the motor nameplate. Consult the motor manufacturer.
Factory setting is the no-load current value for a standard Yaskawa 4-pole motor.
Number of Motor Poles Setting (E2-04)

E2-04 is displayed only when Closed Loop Vector control method is selected. Set the number of motor poles
as written on the motor nameplate.
5-50
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting (E2-05)

E2-05 is set automatically when performing motor line-to-line resistance autotuning. When you cannot per-
form tuning, consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. Calculate the resistance from
the line-to-line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula, and then make the setting
accordingly.
• E-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 75°C of test report] × 0.92 (Ω)
• B-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 75°C of test repor]t × 0.92 (Ω)
• F-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 115°C of test report] × 0.87 (Ω)
Motor Leak Inductance Setting (E2-06)

Set the amount of voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance in E2-06 as percentage of the motor rated
voltage. Make this setting when using high-speed motors because the standard value will be too high. (Nor-
mally, high speed motors have a low inductance compared to standard motors.) If the inductance is not written
on the motor nameplate, consult the motor manufacturer.
Motor Iron Saturation Coefficients 1 and 2 Settings (E2-07)

E2-07 and E2-08 are set automatically during rotating autotuning.
Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Setting (E2-08)

E2-10 is displayed only in V/f control method and can be set to increase the torque compensation accuracy.
The motor iron loss has to be set in kW.
5-51
Setting the V/f Pattern 1
Using the E1- parameters the Inverter input voltage and the V/f pattern can be set as needed. It is not rec-
ommended to change the settings when the motor is used in Open Loop or Closed Loop vector control mode.
Related Parameters
Name
tion Vector Vector
E1-01 Input voltage setting 200 V *1 No Q Q Q
E1-04 Max. output frequency (FMAX) 60.0 Hz No Q Q Q
E1-05 Max. voltage (VMAX) 200.0 V *1 No Q Q Q
E1-06 Base frequency (FA) 60.0 Hz No Q Q Q
E1-07 Mid. output frequency (FB) 3.0 Hz *2 No A A No
15.0 V
E1-08 Mid. output frequency voltage (VB) No Q Q No
*1*2
E1-09 Min. output frequency (FMIN) 1.5 Hz *2 No Q Q A

9.0 V
E1-10 Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN) No Q Q No
*1*2
E1-13 Base voltage (VBASE) 0.0 V *4 No A No No
* 1. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open Loop Vector control factory settings are given.)
* 3. The contents of parameters E1-11 and E1-12 are ignored when set to 0.00.
* 4. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
Setting Inverter Input Voltage (E1-01)

Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1-01 so that it matches the power supply voltage.
5-52
Setting the V/f Pattern

If E1-03 is set to F the V/f pattern can be set individually using the parameters E1-04 to E1-10. See Fig 5.23
for details.
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
Fig 5.23 V/f pattern setting
To set the V/f characteristics linear, set E1-07 and E1-09 to the same value. In this case, E1-08 will be ignored.
INFO
Setting Precautions 5
When the setting is to user-defined V/f pattern, beware of the following points:
• When changing control method, parameters E1-07 to E1-10 will change to the factory settings for that
control method.
• Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
5-53
Digital Operator/Monitor Functions
Setting Digital Operator/Monitor Functions
Related Parameters
Name
tion Vector Vector
o1-01 Monitor selection 6 Yes A A A
o1-02 Monitor selection after power up 1 Yes A A A
o1-03 Frequency units of reference setting and monitor 0 No A A A
o1-04 Setting unit for frequency reference related parameters 0 No No No A
o1-05 LCD Display contrast 3 Yes A A A
o2-02 STOP key during control circuit terminal operation 0 No A A A
o2-03 Inveter kVA selection 0 No A A A
o2-04 User parameter initial value 0 No A A A
o2-05 Frequency reference setting method selection 0 No A A A
o2-06 Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected 0 No A A A
o2-07 Cumulative operation time setting 0 No A A A
o2-08 Cumulative operation time selection 0 No A A A
o2-09 Initialize Mode 0 No A A A
o2-10 Fan operation time setting 0 No A A A
o2-12 Fault trace initialize 0 No A A A
o2-13 “Number of Travels” monitor initialize 0 No A A A
Monitor Selection (o1-01)

Using parameter o1-01 the third monitor item that is displayed in drive mode can be selected.
Monitor Display when the Power Supply is Turned ON (o1-02)

Using parameter o1-02 the monitor item (U1-) that is to be displayed on the Digital Operator/Monitor
when the power supply is turned ON can be selected.
Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units (o1-03)

Set the Digital Operator/Monitor frequency reference and display units using parameter o1-03. The setting in
o1-03 will affect the display units of the following monitor items:
• U1-01 (Frequency Reference)
• U1-02 (Output Frequency)
• U1-05 (Motor Speed)
• U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start)
• d1-01 to d1-17 (Frequency references)
5-54
Changing the Units for Frequency Parameters Related to V/f settings (o1-04)
Using parameter o1-04 the unit for frequency parameters related to the V/f setting can be changed. If o1-04 is
set to 0 it will be Hz. If o1-04 is set to 1 it will be rpm.
Changing the Display Contrast (o1-05)

Using o1-05 the contrast of the LCD display on the digital operator can be raised or lowered. Lowering the
o1-05 value will decrease the contrast and vice versa.
Disabling the STOP Key (o2-02)

This parameter is used to set whether the STOP key on the operator is active during remote control (b1-02 ≠ 0)
or not.
If o2-02 is set to 1, a STOP command from the operators STOP key will be accepted. If o2-02 is set to 0 it will
be disregarded.
Initializing Changed Parameter Values (o2-03)

The current Inverter parameter setting values can be saved as user-set parameter initial values. To save there-
fore parameter value o2-03 has to be set to 1.
To initialize the Inverter parameters using the user-set initial values in memory set parameter A1-03 to 1110.
To clear the user-set initial values in memory, set o2-03 to 2.
Changing the Inverter Capacity Setting (o2-04)

The inverter capacity setting can be set using parameter o2-04. Refer to page 4-60, Factory Settings that
5
Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04) to see parameters that depend on this setting.
Normally it is not necessary to change this setting, unless the control card has been changed.
Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the
Enter Key (o2-05)
This function is active when frequency references are input from the Digital Operator/Monitor. When o2-05 is
set to 1, the frequency reference. Can be incremented or decremented using the UP and DOWN keys without
using the Enter key.
Operation Selection when the Digital Operator/Monitor is Disconnected (o2-06)

This function selects the inverter operation after disconnected the digital operator when a RUN command is
active.
If o2-06 is set to 0 the operation is continued.
If o2-06 is set to 1 the output is switched off and the motor coasts to stop. The fault contact is operated. When
the operator is reconnected an OPR (Operator disconnected) is shown.
Cumulative Operation Time (o2-07 and o2-08)

The inverter has a function that counts the operation time of the inverter cumulatively.
Using parameter o2-07 the cumulative operation time can be changed, e.g. after a replacement of the control
board. If parameter o2-08 is set to 0 the inverter counts the time whenever the power supply is switched ON.
If o2-08 is set to 1 the time when a RUN command is active is counted only. The factory setting is 0.
5-55
Cooling Fan Operation Time (o2-10)
This function counts the operating time of the inverter mounted fan cumulatively.
Using parameter o2-10 the counter can be reset, e.g. when the fan was replaced.
Fault Trace Initialize (o2-12)

This function can be used to initialize the fault trace by setting parameter o2-12 to 1.
“Number of Travels” counter Initialize (o2-15)

Using this parameter the lift operation counter monitor (U1-55) can be initialized.
Copying Parameters (JVOP-160 only)

The Digital Operator/Monitor can perform the following three functions using a built-in EEPROM (non-vola-
tile memory).
• Store Inverter parameter set values in the Digital Operator/Monitor by setting o3-01 to 1 (READ)
• Write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator/Monitor to the Inverter by setting o3-01 to 2
(COPY)
• Compare parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator/Monitor with Inverter parameters settings by
setting o3-01 to 3 (VERIFY)
The data saved in the operator can be protected from overwriting by setting parameter o3-02 to 0. In the case a
READ command can not be executed. If it is nevertheless still done, “PrE” will be displayed at the operator.
Related Parameters
Name
tion Vector Vector
o3-01 Copy function selection 0 No A A A
o3-02 Read permitted selection 0 No A A A
5-56
Storing Inverter set values in the Digital Operator/Monitor (READ)

To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator/Monitor use the following method.
Table 5.1 READ Function Procedure
Step Digital Operator/Monitor Dis-
Explanation
No. play
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
1 Press the Menu Key and select advanced programming mode.
Programming
-ADV-
Initialization
2 Press the DATA/ENTER Key.
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
-ADV-
Press the Increment and Decrement Key until parameter o3-01 is displayed (Copy Function COPY Function
3
Selection). o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel
4 Press the DATA/ENTER Key and select the constants setting display.
o3-01= 0 *0*
COPY SELECT
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel
5 Change the set value to 1 using the Increment Key.
o3-01= 1 *0*
INV OP READ
5
-ADV-
READ
6 Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The READ function will start.
INV OP READING
-ADV-
READ
7 If the READ function ends normally, “End” is displayed on the Digital Operator/Monitor.
READ COMPLETE
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel
8 The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
o3 - 01=0 *0*
COPY SELECT
If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Refer to
page 6-16, Digital Operator/Monitor Copy Function Faults for corrective actions.
5-57
Writing Parameter Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator/Monitor to the Inverter
(COPY)
To write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator/Monitor to the Inverter, use the following method.
Table 5.2 COPY Function Procedure
Explanation
No. play
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
1 Press the MENU Key and select advanced programming mode.
Programming
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 00 = 1
Select Language
-ADV-
Press the Increment and Decrement Key until parameter o3-01 is displayed (Copy Function COPY Function
3
Selection). o3 - 01 = 0
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel
4 Press the DATA/ENTER Key and select the constants setting display.
o3-01= 0 *0*
COPY SELECT
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel
o3-01= 2 *0*
OP INV WRITE
-ADV-
COPY
6 Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The COPY function will start.
OP INV COPYING
-ADV-
COPY
7 If the COPY function ends normally, “End” is displayed on the Digital Operator/Monitor.
COPY COMPLETE
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel
o3 - 01 =0 *0*
COPY SELECT
If an error is displayed, set the parameters again. Refer to page 6-16, Digital Operator/Monitor Copy Function
Faults for corrective actions.
5-58
Comparing Inverter Parameters and Digital Operator/Monitor Parameter Set Values

(VERIFY)
To compare Inverter parameters and Digital Operator/Monitor parameter set values, use the following method.
Table 5.3 VERIFY Function Procedure
Explanation
No. play
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
1 Press the MENU Key. and select advanced programming mode.
Programming
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 00 = 1
Select Language
-ADV-
Press the the Increment and Decrement Key unti the parameter o3-01 is displayed (Copy COPY Function
3
Function Selection). o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel
4 Press the DATA/ENTER Key and select the function setting display.
o3-01= 0 *0*
COPY SELECT
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel
OP
o3-01= 3
INV VERIFY
*0*
5
-ADV-
VERIFY
6 Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The VERIFY function will start.
DATA VERIFYING
-ADV-
VERIFY
7 If the VERIFY function ends normally, “End” is displayed on the Digital Operator/Monitor.
VERIFY COMPLETE
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel
o3 - 01 = 0 *0*
COPY SELECT
If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Refer to
page 6-16, Digital Operator/Monitor Copy Function Faults for corrective actions.
Application Precautions
When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter data and the Digital
• Operator/Monitor data.
• Inverter product and type
INFO
• Software number
• Inverter capacity and voltage class
• Control method
5-59
Prohibiting Overwriting of Parameters
If A1-01 is set to 0, all parameters except A1-01 and A1-04 are write protected, U1-, U2- and
U3- will be displayed. If A1-01 is set to 1, only the parameters A1-01, A1-04 and A2- can be read or
written, U1-, U2- and U3- will be displayed. All other parameters will not be displayed.
If you set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 1B
(write parameters permitted), parameters can be written from the digital operator when the terminal that has
been set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing parameters other than the frequency reference is prohib-
ited. However, the parameters can be read.
Related Parameters
Name
tion Vector Vector
A1-01 Parameter access level 2 Yes A A A
Setting a Password
When a password is set in A1-05 and if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, only the settings of
parameters A1-01 to A1-03, or A2-01 to A2-32 can be modified.
The setting of all parameters except A1-00 can be prohibited using the password function in combination with
setting parameter A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only).
Related Parameters
Name
tion Vector Vector
A1-01 Parameter access level 2 No A A A
A1-04 Password 0 No A A A
A1-05 Password setting 0 No A A A
Setting a Password
The password can be set in parameter A1-05. Normally A1-05 is not displayed. To display and modify A1-05
the MENU and Reset key must be pressed together in the A1-04 display.
5-60
Displaying User-set Parameters Only

The A2 parameters (user-set parameters) and A1-01 (parameter access level) can be used to establish a param-
eter set that contains only the most important parameters.
Set the number of the parameter to refer in A2-01 to A2-32, and then set A1-01 to 1. Using the advanced pro-
gramming mode A1-01 to A1-03 and the parameters set in A2-01 to A2-32 can be read and modified.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change
Name during
Operation
Vector Vector
A2-01
to User setting parameters - No A A A
A2-32
5-61
PG Interface
To get a more precise speed control the inverter has PG interface to connect a pulse generator.
Related Parameters
Name
tion Vector Vector
F1-01 PG constant 1024 No No No Q
F1-02 Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO) 1 No No No A
F1-03 Operation selection at overspeed (OS) 1 No No No A
F1-04 Operation selection at deviation (DEV) 3 No No No A
F1-05 PG rotation 0 No No No Q
F1-06 PG division rate (PG pulse monitor) 1 No No No A
F1-08 Overspeed (OS) detection level 115% No No No A
F1-09 Overspeed detection delay time (OS) 1.0 s No No No A
F1-10 Excessive speed deviation (DEV) detection level 10% No No No A
F1-11 Excessive speed deviation detection delay time (DEV) 0.5 s No No No A
F1-14 PG open-circuit detection delay time 2.0 s No No No A
Setting Number of PG Pulses (F1-01)

Set the number of PG (Pulse Generator/Encoder) pulses in pulses per revolution.
Suit the PG Rotation Direction and Motor Rotation Direction (F1-05)

Parameter F1-05 suits the PG rotation direction to the motor rotation direction. If the motor is rotating for-
wards, set whether it is A-phase leads or B-phase leads.
Inverter
Motor PG (encoder)
Forward
command
Pulse output
A-phase leads when set value = 0 B-phase leads when set value = 1
A-phase A-phase
B-phase B-phase
Example: Forward rotation of standard motor (PG)
Motor output axis rotates

counter-clockwise during In-
Forward verter forward command.
command Rotation
(CCW)
A-phase
B-phase
With the used PG the A-phase leads (CCW) when motor rotation is forward.
Generally, the A-phase leads when the rotation direction is counter-clockwise (CCW) seen from the shaft side
(FWD command is input).
5-62
PG Interface
Setting PG Pulse Monitor Output Dividing Ratio (F1-06)

This function is enabled only when using PG speed control card PG-B2. Set the dividing ratio for the PG pulse
monitor output. The set value is expressed as n for the higher place digit, and m for the two lower place digits.
The dividing ratio is calculated as follows:
Dividing ratio = (1 + n)/m (Setting range) n: 0 or 1, m: 1 to 32

F1-06 = n m
The dividing ratio can be set within the following range: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤ 1. For example, if the dividing ratio is
1/2 (set value 2), half of the number of pulses from the PG are output at the pulse monitor.
Detecting PG Open Circuit (F1-02 and F1-14)

Parameter F1-02 selects the stopping method when a PG disconnection is detected.
PG open (PGO) is only detected when the inverter is running at least with a frequency reference higher than
1% of the maximum output frequency or above the minimum frequency (E1-09) and the PG feedback signal is
missing for the time set in F1-14 or longer.
Detecting Motor Overspeed (F1-03, F1-08 and F1-09)

An overspeed (OS) is detected when the motor speed continues to exceed the set frequency value in F1-08 for
a time longer than set in F1-09. After detecting an overspeed (OS), the Inverter stops according to the setting
in F1-03.
Detecting Speed Difference between the Motor and Speed Reference (F1-04, F1-10
and F1-11)
5
Speed deviation is detected when the speed deviation (i.e., the difference between the speed reference and the
actual motor speed) is too large. Speed deviation (DEV) is detected only after a speed agreement (speed refer-
ence and actual motor speed are within the setting range of L4-02) and if a speed deviation higher than the set
value in F1-10 continues for longer than the time set in F1-11. After a speed deviation is detected, the Inverter
stops according to the setting in F1-04.
5-63
Battery Operation
Using battery operation the car can be moved to the next floor if the power supply fails. The battery operation,
must be enabled by a digital input (H1- = 85).
The battery voltage must be set in parameter L2-11.
Related Constants.
Change Open Closed
Parameter Factory
No. setting
L2-11 Battery Voltage 0V No A A A

Open Closed
Setting Function mane V/f Loop Loop
Vector Vector
85 Battery operation command A A A
Battery operation wiring
SoftCharge
Resistor
A
A
P
A C R U
S V
T W
B
E
Contorl Power D
P
200VClass(DC250V 300V)
400VClass(DC500V 600V) N
E
Sx
Battery Operation
SC setting 85
5-64
Battery Operation
Battery sequence
The following timing chart shows the sequence of battery operation.
Battery voltage
UV det level
Vpn
Coasting battery voltage x base speed

300(600 *1 )x2
Motor speed Brake
*1: 400VClass
using 600V
Fault
C,D input contactor OFF
Approx. 1min
The power source of
these contactors must Battery operation
Approx. 5sec ON
keep supplying even if
power loss. Battery
operation command E ON
Main Circuit
contactor
A,B
0.2 0.3sec
A’contactor
Inverter ready Approx.

1sec
* exteranal operation signal
No.
1
Description
When the bus voltage is blow the under voltage level, the inverter detects the under voltage(UV) fault.
5
2 Turn off the RUN command.
3 C and D contactors must be turned off and turn on the motor mechanical brake.
4 Need the appox. 5sec to start battery operation.
5 The multi-function digital input which is assigned with the battery operation command(E) must be turned ON.
6 A’ contactor must be turned ON after passing 0.2~0.3 sec when A and B main contactors are turned ON.
The RUN commands turns ON after inverter ready status set.
7
The battery operation time must be within 1min.
8 E, A, B and A’ contactors must be turned OFF after RUN command OFF.
(CAUTION)
1. Battery operation speed
The speed during the battery operation will be limited as the following fomula.
Speed during battery operation= (battery voltage x base speed ) / (300Vx2 )
When the 400V Class will be 600Vx2
2.Continuous operation is prohibited.
The cooling fan of inverter is stopped due to the low bus voltage.
Therefore the continuous operation of inverter is prohibited.
5-65
Battery selection
Use the following battery
200V Class 400V Class

Main bus voltage more than 48V more than 96V
Control voltage 200V 400V
Note Main bus voltage during battery operation is decided based on the 10% of motor base speed.
Voltage drop must be less than 5% under the following load condition.
Current of control power : 50W/ control voltage
Current of main power : (motor rated power x speed during battery operation x 200%) /
(battery voltage x 60%( motor efficiency ) x motor base speed)
5-66
Automatic Fault Restart
Automatic Fault Restart

The inverter can be set to restart automatically after a fault occurs. The maximum number of restarts can be
selected.
Auto-resetable Fault codes are: UV1, GF, OC, OV, OL2, OL3, OL4, UL3, UL4, PF, LF
Related Constants.
Change Open Closed
Parameter Factory
No. setting
L5-01 Number of restarts 2 No A A A
L5-02 Restart operation selection 1 No A A A
Number of restarts
The number of reatarts can be set in parameter L5-01. The fault restart intervall time is 2.0 sec.
Fault
DC DC
Injection/ Injection/
Speed
Up/Down
Speed command
Hardware BB
Brake opened (D/O) 5

Fault (D/O)
Auto-Reset
2 sec interval
time
The auto-reset signal is accepted when

the hardware base block signal is recieved .
Fault Relay Operation

Parameter L5-02 can be used to enable or disable the fault relay (terminal MA-MB-MC) during fault retry
condition.
• L2-02 = 1 enabled the fault relay.
• L2-02 = 0 disables the fault relay.
5-67
5-68
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasures for Inverter and motor problems.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ........................... 6-2

Troubleshooting .........................................................6-17
6
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the fault and alarm functions of the Inverter. These functions include fault detec-
tion, alarm detection, operatot programming error detection and auto-tuning error detection.
Fault Detection
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault contact output operates and the Inverter output is switched OFF
causing the motor to coast to stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults.) A fault code is dis-
played on the Digital Operator/Monitor.
The faults can be categorized in two groups:
• Faults that can be rested using an input or the reset key at the Digital Operator without cycling the power
(resetable faults)
• Faults that require to cycle the power (non-resetable faults)
When a fault has occurred refer to the following identify the fault and to correct the causes.
To reset a fault it is necessary to remove the fault and the RUN signal. Only then a Reset signal is accepted.
See the following tables for the faults and corrective actions.
Table 6.1 Fault Detection
Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Remove the motor and run the
Ground Fault Inverter without the motor.
The ground current at the Inverter One Inverter output was shorted Check the motor for a phase to
GF
output exceeded 50% of the to ground and/or a DCCT is ground short.
Ground Fault
Inverter rated output current and defective. Check the output current with
L8-09=1 (Enabled). a clampmeter to verify the
DCCT reading.
Remove the motor and run the
Shorted Inverter output phase-to- Inverter without the motor.
phase, shorted motor, locked Check the motor for a phase-
Overcurrent rotor, load too heavy, accel/decel to-phase short.
OC The Inverter’s output current time too short, contactor on the
Over Current exceeded the overcurrent detec- Inverter output has opened or Verify the accel/decel times
tion level. * closed, a special motor or a motor (C1-).
with a rated current larger than the Check the Inverter for a
Inverter’s ouput current is used. phase-to-phase short at the
output.
DC Bus Fuse Check the motor and the
The fuse in the main circuit is motor cables for short circuits
open. or insulation failures (phase-
PUF Warning: Shorted output transistor(s) or to-phase).
DC Bus Fuse Open Never run the Inverter after terminals.
replacing the DC bus fuse with- Replace the inverter after cor-
out checking for shorted com- recting the fault.
ponents.
The deceleration time is set too Increase the deceleration time

DC Bus Overvoltage short and the regenerative energy (C1-02/04/06/08) or connect a
The DC bus voltage has exceeded from the motor is too large. braking option.
OV the overvoltage detection level.
DC Bus Overvolt Default detection levels are:
200 V class: 410 VDC Check the power supply and
The power supply voltage is too
400 V class: 820 VDC decrease the voltage to meet
high.
the inverter’s specifications.
* “QC” contains “SC” which has been described to JVOP-163.

“SC” is a Short-Circuit.
6-2
Table 6.1 Fault Detection (Continued)

The voltage fluctuations of the
power supply are too high.
Check the input voltage.
DC Bus Undervoltage A momentary power loss
The DC bus voltage is below the occurred.
Undervoltage Detection Level The terminal screws of the input Check the wiring of the input
(L2-05). The default settings are: power supply are loose. terminals.
200V class: 190 VDC Check the input voltage and
400 V class: 380 VDC An open-phase error occurred at
UV1 the wiring of the input termi-
the input terminals.
DC Bus Undervolt nals.
The acceleration time is set too Extend the settings in
short. C1-01/03/05/07
Main Circuit MC
Operation Failure
An error occurred in the inrush
The MC stopped responding
current prevention circuit while Replace the Inverter.
during Inverter operation.
the Inverter was running.
(Applicable Inverter Capacities
200 V class: 37 to 55 kW
Control Power Supply External load was pulling down Remove all connection to the
UV2 Undervoltage the Inverter’s power supplies or control terminals and cycle the
CTL PS Undervolt Unervoltage of the control circuit there was an internal short in the power to the Inverter.
while the Inverter was running. power/gate drive board. Replace the Inverter.
Inrush Current Prevention Cir-
cuit Fault
An overheating of the charging Cycle the power to the
resistor for the DC bus capacitors Inverter.
occurred.
The contactor of the inrush cur-
UV3
rent prevention circuit is defec-
MC Answerback The MC of the charging circuit
did not respond 10 sec. after the
MC ON signal has been output.
tive.
6
Replace the Inverter if the
(Applicable Inverter Capacities fault continues to occur.
200 V class: 37 to 110 kW
400 V class: 75 to 300 kW)
The wiring terminals for the input Tighten the input terminal
power supply are loose. screws
A phase loss occurred in the input
Main Circuit Voltage Fault power supply.
An unusual big ripple on the DC
PF A momentary power loss
bus voltage has been detected.
Input Phase Loss occurred Check the power supply volt-
Only detected when L8-05=1
(enabled) The voltage fluctuations in the age
input power supply are too high.
The voltage balance between the
input phases is bad.
There is a broken wire in the out-
Output Open-phase put cable.
Reset the fault after correct-
An open-phase occurred at the There is a broken wire in the
ing its cause.
Inverter output. motorwinding.
LF The output terminals are loose.
The fault is detected when the
Output Phase Loss
output current falls below 5% of The motor being used has a
the inverter rated current and L8- capacity less than 5% of the Check the motor and Inverter
07=1 (enabled) Inverter's maximum motor capac- capacity.
ity.
6-3
The ambient temperature is too Check for dirt build-up on the
Heatsink Overheat high. fans or heatsink.
The temperature of the Inverter's Reduce the ambient tempera-
There is a heat source nearby.
cooling fin exceeded the setting in ture around the drive.
OH L8-02 and L8-03 = 0 to 2. The Inverter's cooling fan(s)
Heatsink Overtemp stopped.
The Inverter's internal cooling fan Replace the cooling fan(s).
Inverter's Cooling Fan Stopped has stopped
(18.5 kW and larger).
high. fans or heatsink.
Heatsink Overheat
Reduce the ambient tempera-
The temperature of the Inverter’s There is a heat source nearby.
ture around the drive.
OH1 heatsink exceeded 105 °C.
Heatsink Max Temp The Inverter’s cooling fan(s)
stopped.
The Inverter’s internal cooling fan Replace the cooling fan(s).
Inverter’s Cooling Fan Stopped has stopped
(18.5 kW and larger).
Dynamic Braking Transistor Defective or failed dynamic brak- Cycle power to the Inverter.
RR
The built-in dynamic braking ing resistor caused braking tran-
DynBrk Transistr
transitor failed. sistor damage. Replace the Inverter.
Motor Overload Recheck the cycle time and

The load is too large. The acceler-
Detected when L1-01 = 1 to 3 and the size of the load as well as
ation time, deceleration time or
the Inverter’s output current the accel/decel times
cycle time are too short.
exceeded the motor overload (C1-).
OL1 curve. The voltage settings of the V/f
Motor Overload The overload curve is adjustable Check the V/f characteristics
pattern is incorrect for the appli-
using parameter E2-01 (Motor (E1-).
cation.
Rated Current), L1-01(Motor Pro-
tection Selection) and L2-02 The setting of Motor Rated Cur- Check the setting of Motor
(Motor Protection Time Constant) rent (E2-01) is incorrect. Rated Current Setting (E2-01).
Recheck the cycle time and
The load is too large. The acceler-
the size of the load as well as
ation time or deceleration times
the accel/decel times
Inverter Overload are too short.
(C1-).
OL2 The Inverter output current
The voltage settings of the V/f
Inv Overload exceeded the Inverter’s overload Check the V/f characteristics
pattern is incorrect for the appli-
curve. (E1-).
cation.
The size of the Inverter is too Check the setting of Motor
small. Rated Current Setting (E2-01).
Cur Stuck 1 Ensure the values in L6-02
The Inverter’s output current (V/f and L6-03 are appropriate.
OL3 control) or the output torque (Vec- Motor was overloaded.
Cur Stuck 1 tor Control) exceeded L6-02 for
Check application/machine
longer then the time set in
status to eliminate fault.
L6-03 and L6-01 = 3 or 4.
OL4 control) or the output torque (Vec- Motor was overloaded.
Cur Stuck 2 tor Control) exceeded L6-05 for
Check application/machine
status to eliminate fault.
L6-06 and L6-04 = 3 or 4.
6-4

Undertorque Detection 1 Ensure the values in L6-02
UL3 control) or the output torque (Vec-
Motor was underloaded.
Undertorq Det 1 tor control) fell below L6-02 for Check application/machine
longer then the time set in status to eliminate fault.
L6-03 and L6-04 = 7 or 8.
UL4 control) or the output torque (Vec-
Motor was underloaded.
Undertorq Det 2 tor control) fell below L6-05 for Check application/machine
longer then the time set in status to eliminate fault.
L6-06 and L6-04 = 7 or 8.
Motor Overspeed Overshooting/Undershooting are Adjust the ASR settings in the
Detected when F1-03 = 0 to 2 and occurring. C5 parameter group.
A1-02 = 1 or 3. Check the reference circuit
OS The reference was too high.
The motor speed feedback and reference gain.
Overspeed Det
(U1-05) exceeded the setting in
F1-08 for a longer time than the The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 Check the settings in F1-08
setting in F1-09. are not appropriate. and F1-09.
Fix the broken/disconnected
There is a break in the PG wiring.
wiring.
PG Disconnection
Detected when F1-02 = 0 to 2 and The PG is wired incorrectly. Fix the wiring.
PGO A1-02 = 1 or 3 Power is not being supplied to Supply power to the PG
PG Open Detected when no PG (encoder) the PG. properly.
pulses are received for a time
Check if the brake is opened
longer than the setting in F1-14. Wrong brake control sequence
when the RUN command is
when a brake is used.
applied.
The load is too large. Reduce the load.
Excessive Speed Deviation

The acceleration time and decel-
eration time are too short.
Lengthen the acceleration
time and deceleration time.
6
Detected when F1-04 = 0 to 2 and
The load is locked. Check the mechanical system.
DEV A1-02 = 1 or 3
Speed Deviation The speed deviation is greater The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 Check the settings in F1-10
than the setting in F1-10 for a are not appropriate. and F1-11.
time longer than the setting F1-11 Check if the brake is opened
Wrong brake control sequence
when the RUN command is
when a brake is used.
applied.
Zero Servo Fault The torque limit is too small. Increase the torque limit.
SVE
The motor position moved during The load torque is too large. Decrease the load torque.
Zero Servo Fault
Zero Servo Operation. - Check for signal noise.
Control Fault
A torque limit was reached con-
CF Motor parameters were not set
tinuously for 3 seconds or longer Check the motor parameters.
Out of Control properly.
during a deceleration stop in Open
Loop Vector control.
Check for an external fault
An external fault condition was condition.
EF0 External fault input from Com-
present, input from a communica-
Opt External Flt munications Option Card Verify the parameters.
tion option card.
Verify communication signals
6-5
EF3
External fault at terminal S3
Ext Fault S3
EF4
Ext Fault S4
An "external fault" was input
EF5 Eliminate the cause of the
External fault at terminal S5 from a multi-function input termi-
Ext Fault S5 external fault condition.
nal (S3 to S7).
EF6
Ext Fault S6
EF 7
Ext Fault S7
Digital Operator/Monitor Con-
nection Fault
Detected when the digital opera- The digital operator was removed
OPR Check the connection of the
tor is removed and the Inverter during running or the operator
Oper Disconnect Digital Operator/Monitor.
receives its RUN command cable is broken.
through the digital operator
(b1-02=0)
MEMOBUS Communication
Error
Connection is broken and/or the Check the connections and all
CE Detected when control data was
master has stopped the communi- user-side software configura-
Memobus Com Err not received correctly for two sec-
cation. tions.
onds and H5-04 = 0 to 2 and
H5-05=1.
Option Communication Error
Connection is broken and/or the Check the connections and all
BUS After initial communication was
master has stopped the communi- user-side software configura-
Option Com Err established, the connection was
cation. tions.
lost.
Detected no output contactor
SE1 The output contactor or auxiliary
answer back for S1-16 time Check the output contactor.
Sequence Error 1 switch is malfunciton.
setting.
Detecd the output currnet
SE2
below 25% of no-load currnet The output contactor is opened. Check the output contactor.
Sequence Error 2
at opening motor brake.
Detecd the output currnet
SE3
below 25% of no-load currnet The output contactor is opened. Check the output contactor.
Sequence Error 3
during runinig.
Digital Operator/Monitor Com- Disconnect the Digital Opera-
munication Fault 1 Digital operator cable was not tor/Monitor and then connect
Communication with the digital securely connected or digital it again.
CPF00 operator could not be established operator is defective and/or con-
COM-ERR(OP&INV) within 5 seconds after the power trol borard is defective Replace the Inverter.
was supplied to the Inverter.
Cycle the power to the
CPU External RAM Fault The control board is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
Digital Operator/Monitor Com- Digital operator cable was not Disconnect the Digital Opera-
munication Fault 2 securely connected or digital tor/Monitor and then connect
CPF01 After communications with the operator is defective it again.
COM-ERR(OP&INV) digital operator was established, Cycle the power to the
the communication stopped for 2 The control board is damaged.
seconds or more. Replace the Inverter.
6-6

Perform an initialization to
Baseblock circuit error factory defaults.
CPF02 Gate array hardware failure at
A baseblock circuit error occurred Cycle the power to the
BB Circuit Err power-up.
at power-up. Inverter.
Noise or spike was on the control factory defaults.
CPF03 EEPROM error
circuit input terminals or the con- Cycle the power to the
EEPROM Error Check sum is not valid
trol board is damaged. Inverter
CPF04 CPU Internal A/D Converter
Internal A/D Err Fault
trol board is damaged. Inverter.
CPF05 CPU External A/D Converter
External A/D Err Fault
trol board is damaged. Inverter.
The Option Card is not connected Turn off the power and re-
CPF06 properly. install the Option Card again.
Option Card Connection Fault
Option Error The Inverter or Option Card is Replace the Option Card or
damaged the Inverter.
-
6
CPF07 Inverter
ASIC Internal RAM Iault
RAM-Err
The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.
CPF08 -
Watchdog Timer Fault Inverter
WAT-Err
CPF09 CPU-ASIC Mutual -
Inverter
CPU-Err Diagnosis Fault
CPF10
ASIC version fault The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.
ASIC-Err
Turn off the power and re-
Option board connection is not install the option board again
correct. Remove all inputs to the
option board
CPF20 Communication Option Card Perform an initialization to
Option A/D Error A/D Converter Error factory defaults.
Option card A/D converter is Cycle the power to the
faulty. Inverter
Replace the option board
Replace the inverter
6-7
factory defaults.
Noise or spike was on the com- Cycle the power to the
CPF21 Self-diagnosis Fault of
munication line and/or defective Inverter
Option CPU Down Option Board
option board.
Replace the Inverter
Remove any option boards
factory defaults
CPF22 Option Board Code Number Unrecognizable option board is
Option Type Err Fault connected to the control board.
Inverter
Turn off the power and rein-
stall the option board again
An option board was not correctly Perform an initialization to
connected to the control board, or factory defaults
CPF23 Option Board
an option board that was not made
Option DPRAM Err Interconnection Fault Cycle the power to the
for the Inverter is attached to the
Inverter
control board.
6-8
Alarm Detection
Alarms are Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact output. The system will automati-
cally return to its original status when the cause of the alarm has been removed.
During an alarm condition, the Digital Operator/Monitor display flashes and an alarm ouput is generated at the
multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H2-03) if programmed
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.
Table 6.2 Alarm Detection

Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions
Forward/Reverse Run Com-
mands Input Together
EF The external forward and reverse Check external sequence
Both the forward and the reverse
External Fault command were input simulta- logic, so only one input is
run commands are input simulta-
(flashing) neously. received at a time.
neously for 500ms or more. This
alarm stops the motor.
DC Bus Undervoltage
The following conditions
occurred
• The DC bus voltage was below
the Undervoltage Detection
UV For the probable causes please For the corrective actions
Level Setting (L2-05).
DC Bus Undervolt have a look at UV1, UV2 and please have a look at UV1,
• The MC of the inrush current
(flashing) UV3 in table 7.1. UV2 and UV3 in table 7.1
prevention circuit opened.
• The control power supply volt-
age when below the CUV level.
UV Alarm is only detected when
the drive is in a stopped condition
6
DC Bus Overvoltage
The DC bus voltage exceeded the
OV overvoltage detection level. Check the power supply and
The power supply voltage is too
DC Bus Overvolt 200 V class: 410 VDC decrease the voltage to meet
high.
(flashing) 400 V class: 820 VDC the Inverter’s specifications
OV Alarm is only detected when
the drive is in a stopped condition

Heatsink Overheat high. fans or heatsink.
OH The temperature of the Inverter's
Reduce the ambient tempera-
Heatsnk Overtmp cooling fin exceeded the tempera- There is a heat source nearby.
ture around the Inverter
(flashing) ture programmed in L8-02.
Enabled when L8-03 = 3 The Inverter cooling fan(s) has
Replace the cooling fan(s).
stopped.
Overheat Alarm Check the external overheat

An OH2 alarm signal is input An external overheat condition signal connected to the speci-
OH2
from a multi-function digital exists that was connected to one fied digital input.
Over Heat 2
input terminal (S3 to S7) that is of the multi-function input termi-
(flashing) Verify the parameter settings
programmed to OH2 Alarm Sig- nals S3 to S7.
nal Input (H1- = B) in H1-
6-9
Recheck the cycle time and
the size of the load.
Motor Overheating Alarm
Detected when the level at A2, Recheck the accel and decel
OH3
programmed for motor tempera- Overheating of the motor as mea- times (C1-)
Motor Overheat 1
ture (Thermistor input, H3-09 = sured by the motor thermistor. Recheck the V/f pattern
(flashing)
E), exceeds 1.17 V for the time (E1-).
L1-05 and L1-03 = 3.
Recheck the motor rated cur-
rent value (E2-01)

OL3
control) or the output torque (Vec-
Cur Stuck 1 Motor was overloaded
tor control) exceeded L6-02 for
(flashing) Check application/machine
L6-03 and L6-01 = 1 or 2 status to eliminate fault.

OL4
Cur Stuck 2 Motor was overloaded
tor control) exceeded L6-02 for
L6-03 and L6-01 = 1 or 2 status to eliminate fault.

UL3
Undertorque Det 1 Motor was underloaded
tor control) fell below L6-02 for
longer then the time set in L6-03
and L6-01 = 5 or 6. status to eliminate fault.

UL4
Undertorque Det 2 Motor was underloaded
tor control) fell below L6-05 for
longer then the time set in L6-06
and L6-04 = 5 or 6. status to eliminate fault.
Overspeed Alarm Overshooting/undershooting are Adjust the ASR settings in the

Detected when A1-02 = 1 or 3 occurring. C5 parameter group.
OS and F1-03 = 3.
Check the reference circuit
Overspeed Det The motor speed feedback The reference was too high.
and reference gain.
(flashing) (U1-05) exceeded the value set in
F1-08 for a time longer than the The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 Check the settings in F1-08
setting in F1-09. are not appropriate. and F1-09
Fix the broken/disconnected

There is break in the PG wiring.
wiring.
PG Disconnection
Detected when F1-02 = 3 and A1- The PG is wired incorrectly. Fix the wiring
PGO
02 = 1 or 3.
PG Open
Detected when no PG (encoder) Power is not being supplied to the Fix the wiring.
(flashing) PG.
pulses are received for a time
longer than the setting in F1-14
Power isn't being supplied to the Supply power to the PG prop-
PG. erly.
6-10

The load is too large. Reduce the load.
Excessive Speed Deviation
Detected when F1-04 = 3 and The acceleration time and decel- Lengthen the acceleration time
DEV eration time are too short. and deceleration time.
A1-02 = 1 or 3.
Speed Deviation
The speed deviation is greater The load is locked. Check the mechanical system.
(flashing)
than the setting in F1-10 for
longer than the setting in F1-11. The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 Check the settings in F1-10
are not appropriate. and F1-11.
Check for an external fault

EF0 An external fault condition was condition.
Communiation Option Card
Opt External Flt present, input from a communica-
External Fault Verify the parameters.
(flashing) tion option card.
Verify communication signals
EF3
Ext Fault S3 External fault at terminal S3
(flashing)
EF4
(flashing) An external fault was input from a
multi-function input terminal
EF5
(S3 to S7) that is programmed for Eliminate the cause of the
external fault function that alarms external fault condition
(flashing)
only and continues to run the
EF6 Inverter.
(flashing)
EF7
Ext Fault S7 External fault at terminal S7 6
(flashing)
MEMOBUS Communications
Alarm
CE Connection is broken and/or the Check the connections and all
Detected when control data was
MEMOBUS Com Err master has stopped the communi- user-side software configura-
not received correctly for two sec-
(flashing) cation. tions.
onds and H5-04 = 3 and
H5-05 = 1.
Option Communications Alarm

BUS Connection is broken and/or the Check the connections and all
After initial communication was
Option Com Err master has stopped the communi- user-side software configura-
established, the connection was
(flashing) cation. tions.
lost.
The RUN command has not been

Detected when a RESET com- removed and a RESET command
Ext Run Active Remove the RUN signal first
mand is input while the RUN is input by digital input or by the
Cannot Reset and reset the error.
command is still active RESET button on the digital oper-
ator.
Connection was not made prop-

CALL Communications on Standby Check the connections and all
erly or user software was not con-
ComCall Communication has not yet been user-side software configura-
figured to the proper baud rate or
(flashing) established. tions.
configuration (e.g. Parity).
6-11
Operator Programming Errors
An Operator Programming Error (OPE) occurs when an inapplicable parameter is set or an individual param-
eter setting is inappropriate. The Inverter will not operate until the parameter is set correctly; however, no
alarm or fault outputs will occur. If an OPE occurs, change the appropriate parameter by checking the cause
shown in Table 7.3. When OPE error is displayed, press the ENTER key to display U1-34 (OPE Detected).
This monitor will display the parameter that is causing the OPE error.
Table 6.3 Operator Programming Errors

Enter the correct kVA setting
The control board was replaced (o2-04) by referring to the
OPE01
Inverter kVA Setting Error and the kVA parameter (o2-04) is table „Factory settings that
kVA Selection
set incorrectly change with the Inverter kVA
setting“ on page 5-60.
OPE02 Parameter Setting Parameter setting was outside of

Verify the parameter settings.
Limit Out of Range the allowable range.
One of the following errors has

been made in the multi-function
input (H1-01 to H1-05) settings:
• Duplicate functions were
selected.
• UP/DOWN Command(10 and
11) were not selected simulta-
neously.
• The up/down commands (10
and 11) and Accel/Decel Ramp
Hold (A) were selected at the
same time.
• More than one of the Speed
Search inputs (61, 62, 64) were
set simultaneously.
• External Baseblock NO (8) and
OPE03 Multi-function Input Verify the parameter settings
External Baseblock NC (9)
Terminal Selection Error in H1-
were selected at the same time.
• The up/down commands (10
and 11) were selected while
PID Control was enabled.
• The Emergency Stop Com-
mand NO (15) and NC(17) are
set simultaneously.
• PID is enabled and UP and/or
DOWN (10 / 11) command are
set.
• HSB (68) and KEB (65/66)
command are set simulta-
neously.
• Drive Enable (6A) and DC
Injection (60) commands are
set simultaneously.
RUN/Reference Command Verify that the board is

Selection Error installed. Remove the power
OPE05 The Reference Source Selection Option board is not installed or is supply and re-install the
Sequence Select b1-01 and/or the RUN Source option board again
installed incorrectly
Selection parameter b1-02 are set
to 3 (option board) but no option Recheck the setting of b1-01
board is installed. and b1-02.
6-12
Table 6.3 Operator Programming Errors (Continued)

One of the control methods need- Verify the control method
OPE06 ing a PG feedback was selected selection in parameter A1-02
Control method selection error
PG Opt Missing (A1-02 = 1 or 3), but a PG option and/or the installation of the
board is not installed. PG option board.
The same function has been

selected for the analog input
selection and the pulse train input
selection.
• H3-09 = B and H6-01 = 1
OPE07 Multi-function Analog Input/ • H3-09 = C and H6-01 = 2 Check the parameters b1-01,
Analog Selection Pulse Train Input Error b1-01 (Reference Source Selec- H3-09 and H6-01.
tion) is set to 4 (pulse train) and
H6-01 (Pulse Train Input Func-
tion Selection) is set to a value
other than 0 (frequency refer-
ence).
A setting has been made that is

applicable with the current con-
OPE08 trol method. Verify the control method and
Function Selection Error
Constant Selection Example: A function used only the function.
with open loop vector control was
selected for V/f control.
The following settings have been

made at the same time.
• b5-01 (PID Control Mode
Selection) has been set to a
OPE09 value other than 0. Check parameters b5-01,
PID Control Setup Error
PID Selection • b5-15 (PID Sleep Function b5-15 and b1-03.
Operation Level) has been set
to a value other than 0.
6
• b1-03 (Stopping Method Selec-
tion) has been set to 2 or 3.
Check parameters (E1-,

E3-). A frequency/volt-
OPE10 V/f parameter settings were out of
V/f Parameter Setting Error age value may be set higher
V/f Ptrn Setting range.
than the maxium frequency/
voltage.
One of the following parameter

setting errors exists.
• Carrier frequency Gain
C6-05 > 6 and C6-03 (Carrier
Frequency Upper Limit) <
OPE11 Carrier Frequency Parameter
C6-04 (Carrier Frequency Check the parameter settings.
CarrFrq/On-Delay Setting Error
Lower Limit)
• Upper/lower limit error in
C6-03 and 04.
• C6-01 = 0 and C6-02 = 2 to 6.
• C6-01 = 1 and C6-02 = 7 to E.
EEPROM write error Cycle power to the Inverter.

ERR A verification error occurred
The NV-RAM data does not
EEPROM R/W Err when writing EEPROM. Do a factory initialization
match the EEPROM data.
(A1-03)
6-13
Auto-tuning Fault
Auto-tuning faults are shown below. When the following faults are detected, the fault is displayed on the digi-
tal operator and the motor coasts to stop. No fault or alarm outputs will be operated.
Table 6.4 Auto-tuning Fault

There is an error in the data input
Check the input data.
for autotuning.
There is an error in the relation-

Check the Inverter and motor
ship between the motor ouput and
capacity.
Er - 01 the motor rated current.
Motor data fault
Fault
There is an error between the no-
load current setting and the input
Check the motor rated current
motor rated current (when auto-
and no-load current.
tuning for line-to-line resistance
is performed for vector control)
Check the input data.
Er - 02 An alarm is detected during auto- Check wiring and the

Alarm
Minor Fault tuning. machine.
Check the load.
Er - 03 The STOP key was pressed to

STOP key input -
STOP key cancel autotuning.
Er - 04 • Check the input data.

Line-to-Line Resistance Fault • Check motor wiring.
Resistance
Autotuning was not completed in • If the motor is connected to
the specified time. the machine, disconnect it.
Er - 05
No-Load Current Fault • If the setting of T1-03 is
No-Load Current
The auto-tuning result is outside higher than the Inverter
the parameter setting range. input power supply voltage
Er - 08 (E1-01), change the input
Rated Slip Fault
Rated slip data.
• Increase C1-01 (Accelera-

tion Time 1).
Acceleration Fault The motor did not accelerate in • Increase L7-01 and L7-02
Er - 09
Detected only for rotating auto- the specified time (Torque Limits) if they are
Accelerate
tuning (C1-01 + 10 sec) low.
• If the motor is connected to
the machine, disconnect it.
• If the motor is connected to

the machine, disconnect it.
Motor speed Fault The torque reference exceded • Increase C1-01 (Accelera-
Er - 11 Detected only for rotating auto- 100% during acceleration. tion Time 1).
Motor Speed tuning Detected when A1-02 = 2 or 3 • Check the input data (partic-
(Vector contorl). ularly the number of PG
pulses and the number of
motor poles).
The current exceeded the motor

rated current.
Er - 12 Check wiring of the Inverter
Current Detection Fault
I-det. Circuit and the mounting.
Any of U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 has
open-phase
6-14
Table 6.4 Auto-tuning Fault

Auto-tuning was not completed in
Er - 13 the specified time.
Leakage Induc- Leakage Inductance Fault Check motor wiring.
tance Fault Auto-tuning result is outside the
parameter setting range.
Check and correct the motor

The torque reference exceeded settings
V/f Settings Alarm
End - 1 100% and the no-load current
Displayed after auto-tuning is If the motor and the machine
V/f Over Setting exceeded 70% during auto-tun-
complete are connected, disconnect the
ing.
motor from the machine.
During auto-tuning, the measured Check the input data.

Motor Core Saturation Fault
values of motor iron-core satura-
Displayed after auto-tuning is Check the motor wiring.
End - 2 tion coefficient 1 and 2 (E2-07
complete.
Saturation and E2-08) exceeded its setting If the motor and the machine
Detected only for rotating auto-
range. A temporary value was set: are connected, disconnect the
tunig
E2-07 = 0.75, E2-08 = 0.50 motor from the machine.
During auto-tuning, the measured

Rated Current Setting Alarm
End - 3 value of motor rated current Check the motor rated current
Displayed after auto-tuning is
Rated FLA Alm (E2-01) was greater than the set value.
complete
value.
6-15
Digital Operator/Monitor Copy Function Faults
These faults can occur during the digital operator COPY function. When a fault occurs, the fault content is dis-
played on the operator. A fault does not activate the fault contact output or alarm output.
Table 6.5 Digital Operator/Monitor Copy Function Faults

Digital Operator/Moni-
Function tor Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Display
o3-01 was set to 1 to write parameter into the
PRE Set o3-02 to enable writing parameters into
Digital Operator/Monitor when the Opera-
READ IMPOSSIBLE the Operator’s memory.
tor was write-protected (o3-02 = 0).
Retry the READ command (o3-01 = 1).

IFE The data file read from the Inverter was of
READ Check the Digital Operator/Monitor’s cable.
READ DATA ERROR the wrong size indicating corrupted data.
Function
Replace the Digital Operator/Monitor.
A low Inverter voltage has been detected.
An attempted writing of the Inverter data to
RDE
the Digital Operator/Monitor’s EEPROM Retry the READ command (o3-01 = 1).
DATA ERROR
failed.
Replace the Digital Operator/Monitor.
The Inverter type or software number was
CPE Use stored data of the same product (L7) and
different from the stored data in the digital
ID UNMATCHED software number (U1-14) only.
operator
The capacitiy of the Inverter and the capac-

VAE Use stored data for the same Inverter capac-
ity of the stored data in the Digital Operator/
INV. KVA UNMATCH ity only (o2-04).
Monitor are different.
CRE The control method of the Inverter and the

COPY Use stored data for the same control
CONTROL control method of the stored data in the Dig-
Function method (A1-02).
UNMATCHED ital Operator/Monitor are different.
A parameter setting written to the Inverter

CYE
was different from the setting stored in the Retry the COPY function (o3-01 = 2)
COPY ERROR
Digital Operator/Monitor.
Upon completion of the COPY function, the

CSE
Inverter’s data checksum was different than Retry the COPY function (o3-01 = 2)
SUM CHECK ERROR
the digital operator’s data checksum.
Verify VYE The set value of the digital operator and the
Retry the Verify function (o3-01 = 3)
Function VERIFY ERROR Inverter do not match
6-16
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Due to parameter setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as
expected when the system is started. If that occurs, use this section as a reference and perform the appro-
priate countermeasures.
If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to page 6-2, Protective and Diagnostic Functions.
If A Parameter Cannot Be Set

Use the following information if a parameter cannot be set.
The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible:
The Inverter is operating (drive mode).

There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation. Turn off the RUN command and then set the
parameters
Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)

If the parameter A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) settings are different, the parameters for the
initialize mode cannot be changed. Enter the correct password in A1-04.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Shift/RESET key
and the MENU key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then set the password and input the set pass-
word in parameter A1-04.
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed. 6

The set value for the parameter is wrong. Refer to Table 6.3 in this chapter and correct the settings.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.

This is a Digital Operator/Monitor communication error. The connection between the Digital Operator/Moni-
tor and the Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator/Monitor and then re-install it.
6-17
If the Motor Does Not Operate Properly
The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
The frequency reference is 0.00 Hz or a no speed is selected by the digital inputs. Check the input signals and
the frequency reference settings.
Also make sure to set the Baseblock signal. The inverter does not accept any input if it is base blocked.
The load is too heavy

Check the motor current. If it is at the limit of the inverter rated current the load might be too high. Check the
inverter size and the mechanical system. Check also if the brake is operating or not.
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed

If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring may be incorrect. When the Inverter oper-
ates in the forward direction, the forward direction of the motor will depend on the manufacturer and the
motor type, so be sure to check the motor specification
The direction of the motor rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U, V, and W. If using an
encoder, the polarity will also have to be switchend. If the Inverter is operated in V/f mode also parameter b1-
04 can be used to change the rotation direction.
If the Motor Stalls or Acceleration is Slow
The torque limit has been reached.

When a torque limit has been set in parameters L7-01 to L7-04, the output torque will be limited according
these settings. Therefore the motor may not develop enough torque to accelerate or the acceleration time might
be very long.
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.

If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be
increased. Check that the set value is suitable and that the load is not too large for the motor.
The stall prevention level during running is too low.

If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the motor speed and torque will
be limited. Check that the set value is suitable and that the load is not too large for the motor.
Auto-tuning has not been performed for vector control

Vector control will not work properly if auto-tuning has not been performed. Perform auto-tuning, or set the
motor parameters through calculations.
6-18
Troubleshooting
If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy Above Base Speed in Open Loop
Vector Control Mode
The Inverter’s maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage. (For example, if 400 VAC is input,
then the maximum output voltage will be 400 VAC). Vector control uses voltage to control the currents within
the motor. If the vector control voltage reference value exceeds the Inverter output voltage capability, the
speed control accuracy will decrease because the motor currents cannot be properly controlled. Use a motor
with a low rated voltage compared to the input voltage, or change to Closed Loop Vector control.
If Motor Deceleration is Slow

The deceleration time is too long.

The deceleration time setting is too long.

Check the deceleration time setting (parameters C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08).
Motor torque is insufficient.

If the parameters are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, then the motor's power may be insufficient.
Consider increasing the motor and Inverter capacity.
The torque limit has been reached. 6

When a torque limit is reached (L7-01 to L7-04), the motor torque will be limited. This can cause the deceler-
ation time to be extended. Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable.
6-19
If the Motor Overheats
The load is too large.

If the motor load is too large and the torque exceeds the motor’s rated torque, the motor may overheat. Reduce
the loads by either reducing the load or increasing the acceleration/deceleration times. Also consider increas-
ing the motor size.
The ambient temperature is too high.

The motor rating is determined by a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will overheat
if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment where the maximum ambient operating tempera-
ture is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to be within its acceptable range.
Auto-tuning has not been performed for vector control

Vector control may not perform efficiently if auto-tuning has not been performed. Perform auto-tuning, or set
the motor parameters through hand calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Mode Selection (A1-02) to
V/f Control (0 or 1).
If Peripheral Devices are Influenced by the Starting or Running Inverter

The following solutions are possible:
• Change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to
reduce the amount of transistor switching noise.
• Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter's input power terminals.
• Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter's motor terminals.
• Use shielded motor cables or a conduit. Metal shields electrical noise.
• Check the grounding of the Inverter and motor.
• Separate main circuit wiring from control circuit wiring.
If the Earth Leakage Breaker Operates When the Inverter is Running

The Inverter’s output is pulse modulated, i.e. the output voltage consists of high frequency pulses (PWM).
This high frequency signal causes a certain amount of leakage current which may cause the earth leakage
breaker to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage
detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or higher, with an operating time of 0.1 s or more), or one
that incorporates high frequencies countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Inverters). It will also help
to some extent to lower the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02). In addition, remember that the
leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
6-20
Troubleshooting
If There is Mechanical Oscillation

Use the following information when there is machanical vibration:
Oscillation and hunting occur with Open Loop Vector control.

The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine. Adjust parameters C4-01
(Torque Compensation Gain), C4-02 (Torque Compensation Delay Time Parameter) and C3-02 (Slip Com-
pensation Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain parameters and raise the delay time parameters.
If auto-tuning has not been performed, proper perfomance may not be achieved for Vector Control. Perform
auto-tuning or set the motor parameters through hand calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Mode
Selection to V/f Control (A1-02 = 0 or 1)
Oscillation and hunting occur with Closed Loop Vector control

The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the speed control loop (Automatic Speed Regulator, ASR) by
changing C5-01 (ASR Proportional Gain). If the oscillation points overlap with those of the machine and can-
not be eliminated, increase the ASR Delay Time, and then readjust the ASR gain (C5-01)
If auto-tuning has not been performed, proper performance may not be achieved for Closed Loop Vector Con-
trol. Perform auto-tuning or set the motor parameters through hand calculations.
6-21
6-22
Maintenance and
Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter
Maintenance and Inspection........................................7-2
7
Maintenance and Inspection
Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
• The motor should not vibrate or make unusal noises.
• There should be no abnormal heat generation from the Inverter or motor.
• The ambient temperature should be within the Inverter’s specifications.
• The ouput current value shown in U1-30 should not be higher than the motor or the Inverter rated current
for extended period of time.
• The cooling fan in the Inverter should be operating normally.
Before attempting any maintenance checks, make sure that the three-phase power is disconnected. With power
removed from the unit, the DC bus capacitors will stay charged for several minutes. The Charge LED in the
Inverter will glow red until the DC bus voltage is below 10VDC. To ensure that the DC bus is completely dis-
charged, measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltmeter set to the highest scale. Be sure
not to touch terminals immediately after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric shock.
Fig 7.1 Periodic Inspections With no Power Applied

Item Inspection Corrective Procedure
External terminals Are all screws and bolts tight? Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Mounting bolts
Connectors Are connectors tight? Reconnect the loose connectors.
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
Cooling fins Are the fins dirty or dusty? dry air at a pressure of 4 x 105 to 6 x 105 Pa
(4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
All PCBs
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on dry air at a pressure of 4 x 105 to 6 x 105 Pa
the PCBs? (4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Input Diodes Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
Output Transistors
the modules or components? dry air at a pressure of 4 x 105 to 6 x 105 Pa
Power Modules (4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
Are there any irregularities, such as dis-
DC bus capacitors Replace the capacitor or Inverter.
coloration or odour?
Apply power to the Inverter and conduct the following inspection:
Fig 7.2 Periodic Inspections With Power Applied

Item Inspection Corrective Procedure
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration,
or has the toal operating time exceeded
Cooling Fan(s) 20,000 hours. Replace Cooling Fan
Check U1-40 for the elapsed cooling oper-
ation time.
7-2
Periodic Maintenance of Parts

In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, and to prevent down time due to an
unexpected failure, it is necessary to perform periodic inspections and replace parts according to their service
life.
The data indicated in the following table is to be used as a general guideline only. Periodic inspection stan-
dards vary depending on the Inverter’s installation environment conditions and usage. The Inverter’s sug-
gested maintenance periods are noted below.
Fig 7.3 Part Replacement Guidelines

Part Standard Replacement Period Replacement Method
Cooling fan(s) 2 to 3 years (20,000 hours) Replace with new part.
Replace with new part.
DC bus capacitor 5 years
(Determine need by inspection.)
Soft charge contactor – Determine need by inspection.
DC bus fuse
10 years Replace with new part.
Control power fuse
Replace with new board.
PCB capacitors 5 years
(Determine need by inspection.)
Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 30°C/86°F
Load factor: 80% maximum
Operating rate: 12 hours maximum per day
7-3
Cooling Fan Replacement
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter.
If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter, the cooling fan can be replaced
without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
If the Inverter is mounted with the heatsink external to the enclosure, the cooling fan can only be replaced by
removing the Inverter from the enclosure.
Removing the Cooling Fan

1. Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan.
2. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows „1“ and when pull the fan out
in the direction of arrow „2“.
3. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the power connector.
4. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides in direction of arrows „3“ and remove the fan cover from the
fan.
1
3
Air flow direction

Power
2 connector
1
Fan cover
Fig 7.4 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less)
Mounting the Cooling Fan

1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction is correct (see figure above).
2. Connect the cables securely and place the connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Inverter. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on
the Inverter heatsink.
7-4
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW or More

The heatsink cooling fan is attached to the top of the heatsink inside the Inverter. The cooling fan(s) can be
replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan

1. Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan assembly.
2. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator/Monitor, and front cover from the Inverter.
3. Remove the control PCB (if necessary) bracket to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables con-
nected to the control PCB and remove the cooling fan power connectro fro mthe fan board positioned near
the top of the Inverter.
4. Remove the cooling fan power connectors from the gate drive board positioned at the back of the Inverter.
5. Remove the fan assembly screws and pull out the fan assembly from the Inverter.
6. Remove the cooling fan(s) from the fan assembly.
Mounting the Cooling Fan

After attaching the new cooling fan(s), reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow direction faces the top of the
Inverter.
Air flow direction

7
Control card Fan Assembly
bracket
Control card
Connector
Gate driver
Fig 7.5 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 22 kW or More)
7-5
Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card
The Terminal Card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the control wiring.
Removing the Terminal Card

1. Remove the terminal cover, Digital Operator/Monitor and front cover.
2. Remove the wires connected to FE and/or NC on the terminal card.
3. Loosen the mounting screws on the left and right sides of the terminal card („1“) until they are free. It is
not necessary to remove these screws completely. They are captive and self-rising.
4. Pull the terminal card out in the direction of the block arrow „2“.
Mounting the Terminal Card

Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card.
Confirm that the terminal card and the control PCB properly meet at connector CN8 before insertion.
The connector pins may be damaged if the terminal card is forced into place, possibly preventing correct
Inverter operation.
Fig 7.6 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
Always confirm that the input power is removed and the Charge LED is not lit before removing or
mounting the terminal card.
IMPORTANT
7-6
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter and specifications for options and
peripheral devices.
Standard Inverter Specifications ..................................8-2
8
Standard Inverter Specifications
The standard Inverter specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables.
Specifications by Model
Specifications are given by model in the following tables.
200V Class
Table 8.1 200 V Class Inverters

Model Number CIMR-L7C 23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037 2045 2055
Max. applicable motor output
3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
(kW)*1
Rated output capacity
7 10 14 20 27 33 40 54 67 76 93
(kVA)
Output ratings
Rated output current (A) 17.5 25 33 49 64 80 96 130 160 183 224

3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 VAC
Max. output voltage (V)
(Proportional to input voltage.)
Max. output frequency
Up to 120Hz available by programing.
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power supply characteristics
Rated frequency (Hz)

Rated input current (A) 21 25 40 52 68 96 115 156 176 220 269
Allowable voltage fluctua-
+ 10%, - 15%
tion
Allowable frequency fluc-

±5%
tuation
Control characteristics
DC reactor Optional −
Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-pulse rec-
Not possible
tification
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's
rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. A transformer with dual star-delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12-pulse rectification.
8-2
Standard Inverter Specifications
400 V Class
Table 8.2 400 V Class Inverters
Model Number CIMR-L7C 43P7 44P0 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022 4030 4037 4045 4055
Max. applicable motor output
3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
(kW) *1
Rated output capacity
7 9 12 15 22 28 34 40 54 67 80 106
Output ratings
(kVA)
Rated output current (A) 8.5 11 14 18 27 34 41 48 65 80 96 128
Max. output voltage (V) 3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
Max. output frequency Heavy Duty (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150 Hz max.
(Hz) Normal Duty 1 or 2 (high/reduced carrier, variable torque applications): 400 Hz max.
Rated voltage (V)

Power supply characteristics
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Rated frequency (Hz)
Rated input current (A) 10.2 13.2 17 22 32 41 49 58 78 96 115 154
Allowable voltage fluctua-

+ 10%, - 15%
tion
Allowable frequency fluc-

±5%
tuation
DC reactor Optional
Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-phase rec-
Not possile
tification
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa standard motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the
Inverter's rated current is higher than the motor's rated current.
* 2. A transformer with dual star-delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12-pulse-rectification.
8-3
Common Specifications
The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V class Inverters.
Table 8.3 Common Specifications
Model Number
Specification
CIMR-L7C
Sine wave PWM
Control method
Closed Loop Vector control, Open Loop Vector control, V/f control, V/f with PG control
Normal Duty : 8 kHz carrier frequency, 150% overload for 30 sec,
Torque characteristics
higher carrier frequency possible with current derating.
1:40 (V/f control)
Speed control range 1:100 (Open Loop Vector control)
1:1000 (Closed Loop Vector control)
± 3% (V/f control)
± 0.03% (V/f control with PG)
Speed control accuracy ± 0.2% (Open Loop Vector control)
± 0.02% (Closed Loop Vector control)
(25°C ± 10°C)
5 Hz (control without PG)
Speed control response
30 Hz (contorl with PG)
Torque limits Provided (4 quadrant steps can be changed by constant settings.) (Vector control)
Torque accuracy ± 5%
Frequency range 0.01 to 120 Hz
Frequency accuracy (tem- Digital references: ± 0.01% (-10°C to +40°C)
perature characteristics) Analog references: ± 0.1% (25°C ±10°C)
Frequency setting resolu- Digital references: 0.01 Hz
tion Analog references: 0.025/50 Hz (11 bits plus sign)
Output frequency resolu-
0.01 Hz
tion
Overload capacity and
Normal Duty : 150% of rated output current for 30 sec
maximum current
Frequency setting signal 0 to +10V
Acceleration/Decelera-
0.01 to 600.00 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration time settings)
tion time
Approximately 20% (Approximately 125% with Braking Resistor option,
Braking torque
braking transistor built into Inverters of 18.5 kW or less)
Overtorque/undertorque detection, torque limits, 8-speed control (maximum), 4 acceleration and deceleration times, S-curve
acceleration/deceleration, auto-tuning (rotational or stationary), dwell function, cooling fan ON/OFF control, slip compensation,
Main control functions
torque compensation, auto-restart after fault, DC braking for starting and stopping,A fault reset and parameter copy function.
Special lift function and sequence, Brake sequence , shrot floor, hardware baseblock
Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Instantaneous overcurrent
Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
protection
Fuse blown protection Stops for fuse blown.
Overload protection 150% of rated output current for 30 sec
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410 V.
Protective functions
Overvoltage protection
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820 V.
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190 V.
Undervoltage protection
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V.
Momentary power loss
By selecting the momentary power loss method, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
ridethrough
Cooling fin overheating Protection by thermistor.
Stall prevention Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration and running independently.
Grounding protection Protection by electronic circuits.
Charge indicator Glows when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 10 VDC or more.
Enclosed wall-mounted type (IP20) : All models
Protective structure Enclosed wall-mounted type (NEMA 1): 18.5 kW or less (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
Open chassis type (IP00): 22 kW or more (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
Ambient operating tem- -10°C to 40°C (Enclosed wall-mounted type)
perature –10°C to 45°C (Open chassis and IP20 type)
Ambient operating humid-
95% max. (with no condensation)
Environment
ity
Storage temperature - 20°C to + 60°C (short-term temperature during transportation)
Application site Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
Altitude 1000 m max.
Vibration 10 to 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s2 max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s2 max
8-4
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and peripheral devices and also pro-
vides lists of constants.
Inverter Application Precautions ..................................9-2

Motor Application Precautions .....................................9-5
User Constants ............................................................9-7
9
Inverter Application Precautions
Selection
Observe the following precautions when selecting an Inverter.
Installing Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity
power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a compensating capacitor. Excessive peak current
can destroy the converter section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor to improve the power supply
power factor.
If a thyristor convertor, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.
DC or AC reactor
Power sup- required
ply (kVA)
DC or AC reactor
not required
Inverter capacity (kVA)
Fig 9.1
9-2
Inverter Application Precautions
Installation
Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter.
Installation in Enclosures
Install the Inverter in a clean location where it is not subjected to oil mist, dust, and other contaminants, or
install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel space so that
the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not exceed the allowable temperature. Do not install the Inverter
on wood or other combustible materials.
Installation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other vertical surface.
Settings
Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter.
Upper Limits
The maximum output frequency can be set up to 120Hz. Setting the output frequency too high can damage the
machine. So pay attention to the mechanical system and observe required limits for the output frequency.
DC Injection Braking

If the DC Injection Braking Current or the Braking Time are set too high the motor can overheat what can
damage the motor
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
The motor's acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load
torque, and the load's inertial moment (GD2/4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during accelera-
9
tion or deceleration, it might be necessary to increase the acceleration or deceleration time.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.
9-3
Handling
Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter.
Wiring Check
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W.
Check wiring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and control sequences carefully.
Magnetic Contactor Installation

If a magnetic contactor is installed in the power supply line do not exceed one start per hour. Switching more
often can damage the inrush current prevention circuit.
Maintenance and Inspections

After turning OFF the main circuit power supply it can take several minutes before the DC bus is discharged
completely. The CHARGE LED, indicating if the DC bus is charged, glows above a voltage of 10VD.
9-4
Motor Application Precautions
Motor Application Precautions
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor

Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard motor.
Low Speed Ranges

If a standard cooled motor is used at low speed the cooling effects are diminished. If the motor is used in con-
stant torque applications in low speed area the motor may overheat. If full torque is required at low speed con-
tinuously an externally cooled motor must be used.
Installation Withstand Voltage

If the inverter is used with an input voltage of 440 V or higher and long motor cables, voltage spikes at the
motor terminals may occur which can damage the motor windings. Please ensure that the motor insulation
class is sufficient.
Noise
The noise generated in the motor depends on the carrier frequency. The higher the setting the less the gener-
ated noise is.
9-5
Using the Inverter for Special Motors
Observe the following precautions when using a special motor.
Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select an appropriate
Inverter according to the maximum current of the motor.
Gearmotor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer.
In particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in damaging.
If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 50 Hz, consult the manufacturer.
Synchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control.
Single-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase capcitor motor. Any capacitors directly connected to the inverter out-
put may damage the Inverter.
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts and Chains)

If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will
be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism will
make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at low speeds
continuously.
9-6
User Constants
User Constants
Factory settings are given in the following table. These are factory settings for a 200 V Class Inverter with
3.7 kW (open loop vector control).
Table 9.1 User Constants

Factory
No. Name Setting
Setting
A1-00 Language selection for Digital Operator display 0
A1-01 Parameter access level 2
A1-02 Control method selection 3
A1-03 Initialize 0
A1-04 Password 0
A1-05 Password setting 0
A2-01 to
User specified parameters –
A2-32
b1-01 Reference source selection 0
b1-02 RUN command source selection 1
b1-06 Control input scan 1
b1-08 Run command selection in programming modes 0
b2-08 Magnetic flux compensation volume 0%
b4-01 Timer function ON-delay time 0.0 s
b4-02 Timer function OFF-delay time 0.0 s
b6-01 Dwell frequency at start 0.0 Hz
b6-02 Dwell time at start 0.0 s
b6-03 Dwell frequency at stop 0.0 Hz
b6-04 Dwell time at stop 0.0 s
C1-01 Acceleration time 1 3.0 s 9

C1-02 Deceleration time 1
C1-03 Acceleration time 2

3.0 s
C1-09 Emergency stop time
C1-10 Accel/decel time setting unit 1
C1-11 Accel/decel time switching frequency 0.0 Hz
C2-01 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start 0.5 s
C2-02 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end 0.5 s
9-7
Factory
No. Name Setting
Setting
C2-03 S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start 0.5 s
C2-04 S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end 0.5 s
C2-05 S-curve Characteristic time below leveling speed 0.50 s
C3-01 Slip compensation gain 1.0 *1
C3-02 Slip compensation delay time 2000 ms *1
C3-03 Slip compensation limit 200 %
C3-04 Slip compensation selection during regeneration 1
C3-05 Output voltage limit operation selection 1
C4-01 Torque compensation gain 1.00
C4-02 Torque compensation delay time constant 50 ms *2
C4-03 Starting torque compensation (FWD) 0.0 %
C4-04 Starting torque compensation (REV) 0.0 %
C4-05 Starting torque compensation time constant 10 ms
C5-01 ASR proportional (P) gain 1 40 *3
C5-02 ASR integral (I) time 1 0.5 *3
C5-03 ASR proportional (P) gain 2 20 *3
C5-04 ASR integral (I) time 2 0.5 *3
C5-06 ASR delay time 0.004 ms *3
C5-07 ASR switsching frequency 0.0 Hz *3
C5-08 ASR intergral (I) limit 400 % *3
C5-09 ASR proportional (P) gain 3 40.00 *3
C5-10 ASR integral (I) time 3 0.500 s *3
C6-02 Carrier frequency selection 3
d1-01 Frequency reference 1 0.00 Hz
d1-09 Frequency reference 9 Vn 0.00 Hz
d1-10 Frequency reference 10 V1 0.00 Hz
9-8
User Constants

Factory
No. Name Setting
Setting
d1-13 Frequency reference 13 Vr 0.00 Hz
d1-14 Frequency reference 14 Inspection 25 Hz
d1-17 Jog frequency reference / Leveling speed 4.00 Hz
d1-18 Speed priority selection 1
d6-03 Field forcing function selection 0
d6-06 Field forcing function Limit 400 %
E1-01 Input voltage setting *4
E1-04 Max. output frequency (FMAX) 60.0 Hz
E1-05 Max. output voltage (VMAX) *4
E1-06 Base frequency (FA) 60.0 Hz
E1-07 Mid. output frequency (FB) *4
E1-08 Mid. output frequency voltage (VB) *4
E1-09 Min. output frequency (FMIN) *4
E1-10 Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN) *4
E1-13 Base voltage (VBASE) 0.0 V
E2-01 Motor rated current *4
E2-02 Motor rated slip *4
E2-03 Motor no-load current *4
E2-04 Number of motor poles 4 poles
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance *4
E2-06 Motor leak inductance *4
E2-07 Motor iron saturation coefficient 1 0.50
E2-08 Motor iron saturation coefficient 2 0.75
E2-09 Monitor mechanical losses 0.0 % 9

E2-10 Motor iron loss for torque compensation *4
E2-11 Motor rated output power *4
F1-01 PG constant 1024
F1-02 Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO) 1
F1-03 Operation selection at overspeed (OS) 1
F1-04 Operation selection at deviation 3
F1-05 PG rotation 0
F1-06 PG division rate (PG pulse monitor) 1
F1-08 Overspeed detection level 115 %
F1-09 Overspeed detection delay time 0.0 s
F1-10 Excessive speed deviation detection level 10 %
F1-11 Excessive speed deviation detection delay time 0.5 s
9-9
Factory
No. Name Setting
Setting
F1-14 PG open-circuit detection delay time 1.0 s
F4-01 Channel 1 monitor selection 2
F4-02 Channel 1 gain 100.0%
F4-03 Channel 2 monitor selection 3
F4-04 Channel 2 gain 50.0%
F4-05 Channel 1 output monitor bias 0.0%
F4-06 Channel 2 output monitor bias 0.0%
F4-07 Analog output signal level for channel 1 0
F4-08 Analog output signal level for channel 2 0
F5-01 Channel 1 output selection 0
F5-07 Channel 7 output selection 0F
F5-08 Channel 8 output selection 0F
F5-09 DO-08 output mode selection 0
F6-01 Operation selection after communications error 1
F6-02 Input level of external error from Communications Option Card 0
F6-03 Stopping method for external error from Communications Option Card 1
F6-04 Trace sampling from Communications Option Card 0
F6-05 Current monitor unit selection 0
F6-06 Torque reference/torque limit selection from communications option card 0
H1-01 Terminal S3 function selection 24
H2-01 Terminal M1-M2 function selection 40
H3-01 Frequency reference AI-14B CH1signal level selection 0
H3-02 Frequency reference AI-14B CH1 input gain 100.0 %
H3-03 Frequency referenceAI-14B CH1 input bias 0.0 %
H3-04 AI-14B CH3 signal level selection 0
H3-05 AI-14B CH3 function selection 2
9-10
User Constants

Factory
No. Name Setting
Setting
H3-06 AI-14B CH3 input gain 100.0%
H3-07 AI-14B CH3 input bias 0.0%
H3-08 AI-14B CH2 signal level selection 2
H3-09 AI-14B CH2 function selection 3
H3-10 AI-14B CH2 input gain 100.0 %
H3-11 AI-14B CH2 input bias 0.0 %
H3-12 Analog input filter time constant for the AI-14B 0.03 s
H3-15 Terminal A1 function selection 0
H3-16 Terminal A1 input gain 100.0%
H3-17 Terminal A1 input bias 0.0%
H5-01 Station address 1F
H5-02 Communication speed selection 3
H5-03 Communication parity selection 0
H5-04 Stopping method after communication error 3
H5-05 Communication error detection selection 1
H5-06 Send wait time 5 ms
H5-07 RTS control ON/OFF 1
L1-01 Motor protection selection 1
L1-02 Motor protection time constant 1.0 min
L2-05 Undervoltage detection level 190 V
L2-11 Battery Voltage 0V
L3-01 Stall prevention selection during accel 1
L3-02 Stall prevention level during accel 150 %
L3-05 Stall prevention selection during running 1

9
L3-06 Stall prevention level during running 150 %
L4-01 Speed agreement detection level 0.0 Hz
L4-02 Speed agreement detection width 2.0 Hz
L4-03 Speed agreement detection level (+/-) 0.0 Hz
L4-04 Speed agreement detection width (+/-) 2.0 Hz
L4-05 Operation when frequency reference is missing 0
L4-06 Frequency reference value at frequency reference loss 80 %
L5-01 Number of auto restart attempts 2
L5-02 Auto restart operation selection 1
L6-01 Torque detection selection 1 0
L6-02 Torque detection level 1 150 %
L6-03 Torque detection time 1 0.1 s
L6-04 Torque detection selection 2 0
9-11
Factory
No. Name Setting
Setting
L6-05 Torque detection level 2 150 %
L6-06 Torque detection time 2 0.1 s
L7-01 Forward drive torque limit 200 %
L7-02 Reverse drive torque limit 200 %
L7-03 Forward regenerative torque limit 200 %
L7-04 Reverse regenerative torque limit 200 %
L7-06 Torque limit time constant 200 ms
L7-07 Torque Limit Operation during accel/decel 0
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level 75 °C*4
L8-03 Operation selection after overheat pre-alarm 3
L8-05 Input open-phase protection selection 0
L8-07 Output open-phase protection selection 2
L8-09 Ground protection selection 1
L8-10 Cooling fan control selection 0
L8-11 Cooling fan control delay time 60 s
L8-12 Ambient temperature 45 °C
L8-18 Soft CLA selection 1
L8-20 LF detection time 0.2sec
N2-01 Speed feedback detection control (AFR) gain 1.00
N2-02 Speed feedback detection control (AFR) time constant 50 ms
N2-03 Speed feedback detection control (AFR) time constant 2 750 ms
N5-01 Feed forward control selection 1
N5-02 Motor Accel Time 0.178 s
N5-03 Feed forward proportional gain 1.00
o1-01 Monitor selection 6
o1-02 Monitor selection after power up 1
o1-03 Frequency units of reference setting and monitor 0
o1-04 Setting unit for frequency paramenters related to V/f characteristics 0
o1-05 LCD Display contrast adjustment 3
o2-02 STOP key during control circuit terminal operation 0
o2-03 User parameter initial value 0
o2-04 kVA selection 0
o2-05 Frequency reference setting method selection 0
o2-06 Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected 0
o2-07 Cumulative operation time setting 0 hr
o2-08 Cumulative operation time selection 0
9-12
User Constants

Factory
No. Name Setting
Setting
o2-09 Initialize Mode 0
o2-10 Fan operation time setting 0 hr
o2-12 Fault trace initialize 0
o2-15 “No of Travels” monitor initialize 0
o3-01 Copy function selection 0
o3-02 Read permition selection 0
T1-01 Autotuning mode selection 0
T1-02 Motor output power *1
T1-03 Motor rated voltage *1
T1-04 Motor rated current *1
T1-05 Motor base frequency 60.0 Hz
T1-06 Number of motor poles 4 poles
T1-07 Motor base speed 1450 r/min
T1-08 Nember of PG pulses 1024
* 1. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory setting are given.)
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open Loop Vector control factory setting are given.)
* 3. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Close Loop Vector control factory setting are given.)
* 4. The factory setting depend on the Inverter capacity.
9-13
9-14

YASKAWA L7 Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

YASKAWA L7 Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

YASKAWA L7 Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Current Vector Controlled Inverter

This is absolutely imperative!

 3. Transportation and storage

 2. Measures to Ensure Conformity of Yaskawa Frequency inverters to the EMC Directive

Inverter Model Line Filter

Maximum Voltage : AC 480V 3phase

Inverter Model Line Filter

Maximum Voltage : AC 240V 3phase

Varispeed L7 Introduction ......................................................1-2

Table 1.1 Varispeed L7 Models

Confirmations upon Delivery

Table 1.2 Checks

Inverter model MODEL CIMR-L7C43P7 SPEC: 43P71A Inverter

UL file number FILE NO E131457

Fig 1.1 Nameplate

No. Specification No. Max. Motor Capacity

Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers

No. Max. Motor Capacity No. Protective Structure

Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications

 Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

Bottom protective cover

Fig 1.4 Inverter Appearance (18.5 kW or Less)

Control circuit terminals

Main circuit terminals

Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (18.5 kW or Less)

Inveter cover Mounting holes

Digital Operator Nameplate

Fig 1.6 Inverter Appearance (22 kW or More)

Fig 1.7 Terminal Arrangement (22 kW or More)

Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 3.7 to 18.5 kW 200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 55 kW

Fig 1.8 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters

 Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1xIEC IP20)

200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 3.7 to 18.5 kW 200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 55 kW

Fig 1.9 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters

Checking and Controlling the Installation Site

Table 1.4 Installation Site

 Controlling the Ambient Temperature

 Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter

30 mm min. 30 mm min. 120 mm min.

Horizontal Space Vertical Space

Fig 1.10 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space

Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover

 Removing the Terminal Cover

 Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

 Attaching the Terminal Cover

Removing the Digital Operator/Monitor

Removing the Front Cover

Mounting the Front Cover

Mounting the Digital Operator/Monitor

Fig 1.15 Mounting the Digital Operator/Monitor

Removing the Digital Operator/Monitor

Removing the Front Cover

 Attaching the Front Cover

Attaching the Digital Operator/Monitor

Connections to Peripheral Devices..............................2-2

AC reactor for power

Input noise filter

DC reactor for power

3. Transportation and storage

2. Measures to Ensure Conformity of Yaskawa Frequency inverters to the EMC Directive

Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1xIEC IP20)

Controlling the Ambient Temperature

Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter

Removing the Terminal Cover

Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

Attaching the Terminal Cover

Removing the Digital Operator/Monitor

Removing the Front Cover

Mounting the Front Cover

Mounting the Digital Operator/Monitor

Removing the Digital Operator/Monitor

Removing the Front Cover

Attaching the Front Cover

Attaching the Digital Operator/Monitor

Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors

Main Circuit Configurations

Wiring the Main Circuits

Wiring Main Circuit Inputs

Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit

Connecting a Braking Resistor and Braking Unit (CDBR)

Connecting a Braking Resistor and Braking Unit (CDBR)

Connecting the battery power supply

Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines

Control Circuit Terminal Functions